Home

User Manual CSA8000 Communications Signal Analyzer TDS8000

1. CH1 CH2 NA NA CH 3 CH 4 CH5 CH 6 CH7 CH 8 N A N A CH1 CH2 CH3 CH 4 CH5 CH 6 CH7 CH8 CH 1 N A CH 2 N A N A N A Cra CH 4 CH5 CH 6 CH 7 CH8 Not Available Figure 1 2 Maximum inputs in three configurations Install probes cables and other connection accessories to your sampling modules as appropriate for your application and sampling module Again consult your sampling module and connection accessory manuals Continue with the next section after installing the sampling modules CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Installation Connect the Peripherals The peripheral connections are mostly the same as those you would make on a personal computer The connection points are shown in Figure 1 3 See Table 1 1 on page 1 12 for additional connection information WARNING Before installing peripheral accessories to connectors mouse keyboard etc power down the instrument See Powering Off the Instrument on page 1 14 Description Icon Label Locations Monitor SVGA OUT POME acidi RS 222 s COM Aa Network eeee PS2 MOUSeb nnan PS2 keyboardl Audio line out Audio line in Removable hard drive CD GIVES orestis
2. COM OO SVGA OUT C OQ E1 st ee GPIB PCMCIA IEEE STD 488 PORT SCOPE ONLY TYPE 2 TYPE 3 VGA OUT O O SC je PIB G GPIB IEEE STD 488 PORT SCOPE ONLY VGA OUT Monitor PCMCIA Card slot TYPE 2 TYPE 3 IP roduct ships with a USB keyboard that plugs into the USB port and a USB mouse that plugs into the back of the keyboard Figure 1 3 Locations of peripheral connectors on rear panel CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 1 11 Installation Table 1 1 Additional accessory connection information Item Description Monitor If you use a non standard monitor you may need to change the the Windows 98 display settings to achieve the proper resolution for your monitor P rinter Connect the printer to the EPP enhanced parallel port connector directly If your printer has a DB 25 connector use the adapter cable that came with your printer to connect to the EPP connector For information on printer usage see Printing Waveforms on page 3 120 Rackmount Refer to the CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Rackmount Installation Instructions for information on installing the rackmount kit Other Refer to the Application release notes on your System Rebuild CD for possible additional access
3. Click Acquisition inthe Setup menu 2 Select an acquisition mode sample average or envelope If you select average use the spinbox ta select the number of samples to average 3 Select a Stop After condition This tells the instrument when ta stop acquiring Select Runistop Button Only ta use the Envelope JL Stop After v Run Stop Button Only Condition Histogram Waveforms F G Stop Action Run stop button in the None A toalbar to start and stop Filename acquisitian Select Condition and select a stop condition from the ru illelasosm list Ilsa tha Ey Pa eee jg Ring Bell CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 149 Accessing Online Help Overview To enable full 3 150 text search To use the online help Cont 11 If you cannot find the information in the Contents or Index tabs of the online finder you may wantto enable full text search From the application menu bar select Help and then select Contents amp Index See right 12 From the online help finder see below choose the Find tab Help Topics 8000 Neries Online Help Contents Index Find Find Setup Wizard Find enables you to search for specific words and phrases in help topics instead of searching for information by category Before you can use Find Windows must first create a list for database which cont
4. 10x attenuator Figure 1 11 Hookup for the time base tests 1 28 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Incoming Inspection 3 Set up the instrument a Push the Trigger MENU front panel button to display the Trig Setup dialog box b Click Internal Clock under Trigger Source in the Trig Setup dialog box The Internal Clock rate should be set to 200kHz c Push the Trigger MENU front panel button again to dismiss the Trig Setup dialog box e Push the channel button for the channel you connected to in step 2 The button lights and the channel display comes on See Figure 1 12 page 1 29 Turn the Vertical SCALE knob to set the vertical scale to 20 mV div The channel scale readout is displayed in the Control bar at the bottom of the graticule VERTICAL P e I Channel buttons Figure 1 12 Channel button location 4 Set the time base Set the Horizontal SCALE to 1 us div The horizontal scale readout is displayed in the Control bar at the bottom of the graticule S Verify that the Main time base operates Confirm the following statements are true M One period of the internal clock signal a square wave is about five horizontal divisions on screen See Figure 1 13 on page 1 30 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 1 29 Incoming Inspection m Rotating the Horizontal SCALE knob clockwise expands the waveform on screen more horizontal divisions per waveform period counter
5. 3 79 Cursor Units Depend on Sources osc dora we Yeux V EID oa E ha a 3 80 To Take a Cursor Measurement cacicceve uode dare deux UD cao daos 3 81 Tonet te Cursor DOUCES rereset raaa d dde PUB qua unu 74 E ORO CC Roa 3 82 IV CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Table of Contents Optimizing Measurement Accuracy 2 4 5404 6440540054 EE RESET ened ous 3 83 M e ACTED 3 83 CODE O aae aE SEREN EEE E SE E SE 3 83 To Compensate the Instrument and Modules 005 3 84 To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations 3 87 Creating Math Waveforms ccccccccccccccccsccsccees 3 89 Defining Math Waveforms x 2 24 249 4 91 374 99 04 919 EMS Gases YE OES ES 3 89 Wye rr 3 90 MaS SPCClal eens rrr 3 90 ge tU aeee a e a LO OL IT TIT 3 90 Measurement SCalats aues o rect Re e 3 niid Ee ERR AES Penne es 3 90 Wiat SE XCINGCd s oeedeet unas Sra E dian E es 3 90 4 ca USING e ee a a hes E SEA 3 9 HOW TO CL Mele rarere dod he eudeEcce qe teas cuseede eae ES 3 9 spec P rrr 3 9 Source Dependent OS esatudcese dedy qe esa Ses educ Rex sd sads Et 3 92 Time Base Dependenci b a ieu dedo dese ETESSPSaE dan oes ES 3 92 Expression Syntax otek ad ER ENS coe edad Musae px Ama s 3 92 To Define a Math Waveform oo acecepeeasee 164339 193 03 VH eG ee ete 3 93 Operations on Math Waveforms 24 0 54 065 6064s5 SEES RE S268 oR EMSRS 3 95 Wy SOT auc epe eERERCSE
6. 3 38 Figure 3 12 Triggered versus untriggered displays 3 39 Figure 3 13 Trigger inputs eer nn 3 40 Figure 3 14 Holdoff adjustment can prevent false triggers 3 43 Figure 3 15 Trigger to End Of Record Time EORT 3 44 Figure 3 16 Display elements eere 3 48 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual ix Table of Contents Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 Figure 3 21 Horizontal position includes time to Horizontal Reference ce ern 3 53 Graticule cursor and automatic measurements 3 65 Measurement annotations on a waveform 3 66 High Low tracking methods 3 69 Reference level calculation methods 3 71 Horizontal cursors measure amplitudes 3 78 Figure 3 22 Figure 3 23 Figure 3 24 Figure 3 25 Figure 3 26 Figure 3 27 Figure 3 28 Figure 3 29 Figure 3 30 Figure 3 31 Figure 3 32 Components determining Time cursor readout values 3 80 Functional transformation of an acquired waveform 3 89 Export dialog DOX iw ee REC E3 Y RrxCCE CORPO RES 3 117 Print dialog BOX 423323 SURE 44s IPod CR OE COR S 3 120 Creating a user mask sese ERA ET EEEERE Rees 3 126 Adding a new vertex eeeeee ern 3 126 Vertical histogram view and statistics on data 3 134 Normal vector view of a waveform
7. 3 81 Measuring Waveforms Overview To take cursor measurements Cont Related control elements and resources To reassign cur 6 Press the Cursor button repeatedly to toggle through the sors cursor selections until the cursors are off Then selecta new waveform on screen Tip You can set the cursors source s directly using the procedure listed at right See To Set the Cursor Sources on page 3 82 End of Procedure To Set the Cursor Sources You can target each cursor to the source it is to measure See Cursors Treat Sources Independently on page 3 79 To do so use the procedure that follows Overview To set the cursor sources Related control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 Display the waveforms to be measured on screen The waveform may be a channel reference or math waveform If the source to be measured is in the Magl or Mag2 See page 3 23 for acquisition setup and time base turn that time base on page 3 45 for trigger setup Display the Cur 3 From the application menu bar select Setup and then Setup Utilities H sor Setup dia select Cursors See right Vertical log box Hari zontal Acquire Trigger Measurement Mask Display Histogram VA Fes um 3 82 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Measuring Waveforms Overview To set the cursor sources Cont Related control elements and resources Select the cur 4 From the pop up list see right for
8. Frame Scan Check to m Enabled I Auto Position Start scan Start Bit Scan Bits 11 127 Click to Reset Help restart scan 3 33 Acquiring Waveforms Overview To acquire in FrameScan mode Cont Control elements and resources Set a display 12 If you want to display the frame scanned acquisition as mode an eye diagram set one of the following display modes pr m Select Infinite Persistence or Variable Persis Copy tence in the Display Setup dialog box from the Send To Back application menu bar select Setup and then select Display v Show Right click the waveform icon left side of the screen in the waveform bar of the waveform being scanned and select Color Grade in the menu Properties For more 13 For more help on FrameScan acquisitions click the information Help button in the Setup dialog box to access contextual help on screen See page 3 145 to learn about using online help 3 34 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Acquiring Waveforms To Catch a Bit Error Overview Prerequisites 1 mask testing need to capture a defective bit and examine the pattern leading up to it The instrument should be set up per the previous procedure Pause the acquisition system push the Run Stop button on the front panel Infinite persistence and color grading display modes should be off if turned on in the previous procedure From the application menu
9. UnaryOperator Term lt UnaryOperator gt Expression BinaryExpression Term lt BinaryOperator gt Term lt Scalar gt lt BinaryOperator gt Term Term lt BinaryOperator gt lt Scalar gt Term lt Waveform gt Expression CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Creating Math Waveforms lt Scalar gt Integer Float lt Meas Result gt lt Waveform gt lt Channel Waveform gt ReferenceWaveform lt ChannelWaveform gt C11 C2 C3 C4 I C5 I C6 C7 C8 ReferenceWaveform R1 R2 I R3 I RAI R5 I R6I R71 RS lt UnaryOperator gt Integrate Differentiate Average Max Min Filter Vmag Exp log In sqrt lt BinaryOperator gt 4 1 1 1 lt Meas Result gt meas meas2 meas3 meas4 meas5 meas6 meas7 meas8 To Define a Use the procedure that follows when defining a math waveform Remember you Math Waveform should first ensure that the sources you use exist Channel sources will be acquired when used in a math expression reference waveform sources should contain saved waveforms and so on These sources do not have to be displayed to be used Overview To define a math waveform Related control elements amp resources Prerequisites 1 All channel and reference waveforms and automatic o measurement scalars that you will use in your math waveform must be available channels and references Z contain d
10. 2 2 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Operating Basics To read about Refer to these documents Description Online Help System Access online help from the instrument for context sensitive information on virtually all controls and elements on screen Online help includes a setup guide of proce dures for applying all instrument functions See Accessing Online Help on page 3 145 GPIB Commands Online Programmers Guide Access this online guide from the instrument from its Help menu Quickly find the syntax for Siamese PF any command and copy the command if desired Read about communication error handling and other information on GP IB usage Additionally the printable version of this online help file is available in PDF format on the Tektronix website See Contacting Tektronix for information on how to access our website You may also want to obtain the optional service manual for this product if you self service or performance test this instrument See Optional Accessories on page 1 36 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 2 3 BEEN Ae System Overview Maps The instrument and its sampling modules comprise a highly capable waveform acquisition test and measurement system The following model provides background information on its operation which in turn may provide you insight on how the instrument can be used Functional Model Map Modular Sampling Signal Processing Display I O
11. Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported Table B 1 Supported amplitude measurements Cont Low Maximum Mean Minimum Negative Overshoot Peak to Peak Positive Overshoot ug RISE Bj RMS Area Measurements Category and Definition Amplitude measurement The value used as 0 whenever High Ref Mid Ref and Low Ref values are needed as in fall time and rise time measurements May be calculated using either the min max or the histogram mean or mode method See High Low Method on page 3 69 Measured over the entire waveform or gated region Amplitude measurement The maximum amplitude Typically the most positive peak voltage Measured over the entire waveform or gated region Amplitude measurement The arithmetic mean over the entire waveform or gated region Amplitude measurement The minimum amplitude Typically the most negative peak voltage Measured over the entire waveform or gated region Amplitude measurement Measured over the entire waveform or gated region _ Low Min NegativeOvershoot Amplitude x 100 Amplitude measurement The absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude in the entire waveform or gated region Amplitude measurement Measured over the entire waveform or gated region Max High Amplitude Amplitude measurement The true RMS voltage over the entire waveform or gated region PositiveOvershoot x 10096 Table B 2 Supported area measurements Nam
12. For in depth 5 Most dialog boxes whether setup or other types have a contextual Help button as shown right Click the button to open the overviews help system with an overview of the dialog box that s currently displayed See below Color Click or touch here Ej TOSCSAS000 Online Help Heb tones Be mee s gt eere Cursor Setup dialog box Use this dialog box to set up the cursor properties and display vevien Finefon Y Dus O o O Setup Dialog Overview Setups This dialog box gathers all controls for Mask TOR Lisp cursor setup such as cursor function and Vert Horz Acq Trig cursor 1 and cursor 2 settings Wim Database Hist Cursor Meas See Cursor Function Settings for information on the different cursor types What do you want to do next n Learn more about cursor controls C Vertical Bars He to step by step procedure for setting f Horizontal Bars up cursor controls Waveform Cursor 1 Source Mam C gt Position Color CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 147 Accessing Online Help Overview To use the online help Cont Control elements amp resources To dig deeper 6 You can search for in depth help using methods with HelplTriggered Waveforms 0 which most users of P Cs are familiar from the i application menu bar select Help and then select Contents amp Index See right Setup Guide Programmer Guide About TOS 054 e000 F
13. OC9 FC531 Optical 531 2 Mb s 466 56 Mb s OC12 STM4 622 08 Mb s FC1063 Optical 1 0625 Gb s OC18 FC133 Electrical 132 7 Mb s 933 12 Mb s OC24 FC266 Electrical 265 6 Mb s 1244 2 Mb s 0C36 FC531 Electrical 531 2 Mb s 1866 2 Mb s OC48 STM16 FC1063 Electrical 1 0625 Gb s 2488 3 Mb s CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases Table 3 9 Standard masks Cont SONET SDH Fiber channel Other OC192 STM64 FEC1066 0C768 FEC42066 9953 Mb s and 10 66 Gb s 1 This mask is a preliminary estimate of a 9 953Gb s OC192 STM64 based upon established qualitative mask shapes from the accepted 2 48832Gb s eye mask Users can define alternate interpretations of a 10 Gb s mask using the Mask Edit feature to edit this mask or by creating a User mask Mask Counts The instrument lists statistics for each mask polygon in the enabled standard or user in the Mask readout on the right side of the instrument screen Each mask is listed by its number with its count of hits the number of hits common to all masks and the total count of waveforms acquired Mask Editing Masks can be edited in which case they become a User mask Some tips on creating and using masks follow B When editing locate one point along the left edge or right edge of the mask further left or further right than any other point You can still create straight lines along the edge just place one point further left of righ
14. Pixel A visible point on the display The instrument display is 640 pixels wide by 480 pixels high Pop up menu A menu that displays when you right click an application element such as a channel or its icon a measurement or other readout Usually provides quick access to settings related to the object clicked Probe An instrument input device Quantizing The process of converting an analog input that has been sampled such as a voltage to a digital value Real time sampling An alternate sampling mode where the instrument samples to completely fill a waveform record from a single trigger event This instrument does not use real time sampling it samples sequentially See Sequential equivalent time sampling on page Glossary 8 Record length The specified number of samples in a waveform Reference memory Memory in an instrument used to store waveforms or settings You can use that waveform data later for processing The instrument saves the data even when the instrument is turned off or unplugged CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Glossary 7 Glossary Glossary 8 Reference waveforms Waveforms that are static not live see live waveforms Reference waveforms are channel or math waveforms that you save to references or to files in the instrument file system Once saved they do not update Sample acquisition mode The instrument creates a record point by saving the first sample during each acquisition interval That is
15. controls tool bar readout etc amp z Be wav Fut C Run Stop Acq Mod When you perform this step the help system pops up a Timing nil short definition or a label of the control See right For a more 3 Click the What s This button in the main display or in a IEEE iej x robust dialog box The button varies in form as shown at right cescription After clicking the mouse pointer changes to the ack Jr oov aH 50 following icon ey hf rud HER zx Now click the control you want described A bubble pops up describing the control See below NN E 3 X What s This button for main display 3e Sample Trig Interal Cle wfm Database Hist Cursor Meas su Mask TOR Disp tjm AY S ARTEL Vert Harz Acq Trig C1 10w idiv What s This button for dialog boxes Trigger Source C External Direct C Estemal Prescaler Internal Clock trigger ka Click this to trigger off the internal clock source and select the Wim Database Hist Cursor k clock frequency from the pull down list at right Use an internal E clock trigger when working with TOR to synchronize the M ask TOR l Disp generation of TOR step pulses D Verl Horz Acq Trig Trigger Source C External Direct 3 146 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Accessing Online Help Overview To use the online help Cont Control elements amp resources Tl Position 16 66ns
16. 41 Probe to Trigger Source Connection n sanasan anneanne 3 41 High Frequency Triggering and Metastability Reject 3 42 Adj s ng Holdoff RT 3 42 Usable Holdo ereere erretra oe ced one oA Ronee aar e a do A REGE 3 43 Requested vs Actual Holdoff 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 3 44 Wi FE cem 3 45 Displaying Waveforms ug s REOR ACRHACA RC URN CRURA REC 3 47 Using the Waveform Display 0 0 ccc cece eee 3 47 Way Use P TT C 3 49 What s Special 54 bbws eee bee ne Babee hiihii ae ee ae aed 3 49 Flexible Display Control 0 0 0 0 0c ccc eee eens 3 49 Multiple Time base Views 00 cece nne 3 49 Fast Access to Zoom cs aes dra ees S der Gear Gee Rae p P dL RR 3 49 lacu duh s sreaieeia nerie hrei R Rehan 3 49 What s Excluded oss come beets Go ehe iarri E Re E ake ae oe 3 49 Keys to USINE psersrinissseiansseia arein beh ke Ranei Rae SERS 3 50 Waverton Display aa odi x delen PCIe CIC n de 3 han or PCIE hana 3 50 Operations on Selected Waveforms 000 ce eee eee 3 50 co M PTCPPP 3 51 Usine Multiple Views odere em enm X RT R9 os 3 51 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual iii Table of Contents Operations on the Selected Time Base View 3 51 Waveform Operations that Cross Time Base Views 3 52 Display Controls vs Acquisition Controls
17. 60 Phase measurement B 5 Phone number Tektronix xv CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Pixel Glossary 7 Pop up menu Glossary 7 Position considerations for setting 3 6 horizontal 3 7 vertical 3 6 Positive Crossing measurement B 5 Positive Duty Cycle measurement B 5 Positive Overshoot measurement B 2 Positive Width measurement B 5 Power applying amp removing 1 12 1 14 Preview mode 3 49 usage limitations 3 49 Printing information missing in print out 3 120 waveforms 3 120 Probe used on Trigger Direct input 3 41 Probe channel deskew Glossary 2 Probes Definition Glossary 7 Procedure back up user files 1 15 Check the Package Contents 1 5 create emergency startup disk 1 14 diagnostics 1 20 first time power on 1 12 functional tests 1 23 hardware tests 1 32 incoming inspection 1 19 operating system reinstall 1 16 operating system tests 1 32 running QAPlus Win 1 33 To Autoset 3 11 To Clear References 3 115 To Compensate the Instrument and Modules 3 84 To Create a New Mask 3 133 To customize the database display 3 143 To Customize the Graticule amp Waveforms 3 62 To Define a Math Waveform 3 93 To Deskew Channels 3 86 To Display Waveform in a MagView 3 57 To Display Waveform in the Main View 3 55 To Edit a Mask 3 130 To Localize a Measurement 3 75 To Mask Test a Waveform 3 127 To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Comp
18. Occasionally new versions of the software may become available at our web site See Contacting Tektronix on page xv in Preface Firmware Upgrade Tektronix may offer firmware upgrade kits for the instrument Contact your Tektronix service representative for more information see Contacting Tektronix on page xv Sampling Modules Supported This product can use the following optical and electrical sampling modules listed below These modules which plug into the instrument are more fully described in their respective user manuals These manuals were shipped with those sampling modules that were ordered with this product The sampling modules listed here were available at the time this manual was published see your Tektronix product catalog for current offerings Optical Sampling Modules m 80CO1 622 2488 9953 Mbps 20 GHz optical module Clock Recovery 622 2488 Mbps added with option CR M 80C02 9 953 Gbps 20 30 GHz optical module Clock Recovery 9 953 Gbps added with option CR m 80C03 1063 1250 2488 Mbps optical module Clock Recovery added with option CR CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 1 3 Product Description m 80C04 10 Gb s optical module with FEC support Option CR1 adds 9 953 Gb s clock recovery Option CR2 adds 9 953 and 10 66 Gb s clock recovery m 80C05 40 30 20 GHz and OC 192 optical module m 80C06 50 GHz optical module for 40 Gb s RZ telecom Electrical Sampling Modules m 30E01
19. TCross sigma Eye pattern optical measurement The peak to peak value for the edge jitter in the current horizontal units 1 Jitter PP TCross1pp B 3 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported Table B 3 Supported eye pattern optical measurements Cont Name Category and Definition Noise Pk Pk Eye pattern optical measurement The peak to peak value of the noise of the top or base of the signal as specified by the user 1 Noise PK Pk PTOPpk pk or PBaSepy pk Noise RMS Eye pattern optical measurement The RMS value of the noise of the top or base of the signal as specified by the user Quality Factor Eye pattern optical measurement Ratio of eye size to noise d S N Ratio Eye pattern optical measurement Ratio of the signal amplitude to the noise of the top or base of the signal as specified by the user Quality Factor PTOPmean PBaS nean PTOPsigma PBaSesigma S N Ratio PTop PBase PTopsigma or PBaS sigma 1 You can customize these eye optical measurements First display the Meas Setup dialog box from the UI application Setup menu In the dialog box select your eye pattern optical measurement then select the Region tab Then To choose between jitter at the eye crossing or the mid ref crossing use the Jitter At selection to choose Eye Cross or Mid Ref for your jitter measurement M To choose between noise at PTop or PBase use the Noise At selection to choose High top or Low base f
20. Time base system Signal processing amp transformation system Using the Waveform Display The waveform display see Figure 3 16 is part of the User Interface UI application The UI takes up the entire screen of the instrument and the waveform display takes most of the UI Some terms that are useful in discussing the waveform display follow CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 47 Displaying Waveforms 3 48 3 Upper limit of graticule Selected waveform 1 Waveform display 3 Lower limit of graticule Selected waveform 2 Graticule 5 Horizontal reference 6 Preview mode indicator a ON om PREVIEWS o r3 I D gt 7 Main view D MM MENU 200 Onsa P UD on 7 Magl view 4 Horizontal scale readout selected waveform 25 Dnsdi Figure 3 16 Display elements 1 Waveform display the area where the waveforms appear The display comprises the time bases and graticules the waveforms masks histograms and readouts 2 Graticule a grid marking the display area of a view Each graticule is associated with its time base 3 Upper and lower amplitude limits readouts the upper and lower boundary level of the graticule for the selected waveform 4 Horizontal scale readout the horizontal scale of the selected waveform 5 Horizontal reference a control that you can position to set the point around which channel waveforms expand and contract horizon
21. amp 80E04 Electrical Sampling Module User Manual 80C00 Optical Sampling Module User Manual 80A01 Trigger Prescale Limiting Preamplifier Module User Manual CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Programmer Online Guide CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Service Manual Description An online help system integrated with the User Interface application that ships with this product A quick reference to major features of the instrument and how they operate The user manual for the electrical sampling modules Included as a standard accessory if you ordered electrical sampling modules with this instrument Shipped in the sampling module package notthe main instrument package The user manual for the optical sampling modules Included as a standard accessory if you ordered optical sampling modules with this instrument Shipped in the sampling module package not the main instrument package The user manual for the 80401 Trigger P rescale Limiting Preamplifier Module Included as a standard accessory if you ordered this module with this instrument Shipped in the module package not the main instrument package An alphabetical listing of the programming commands and other information related to controlling the instrument over the GPIB Describes how to service the instrument to the module level This optional manual must be ordered separately You can insert the module user manuals in Appendix C which this manual provides for keeping these manuals tog
22. but is settable from 0 to 100 In the Measurement Setup dialog box first select an eye measurement and then select the Region tab The T1 values are vertical and horizontal values associated with the leftmost crossing point These areas are used to establish the following directions B TCross1 mean the horizontal mean of the left crossing point at TCross m TCrosslsigma the horizontal standard deviation of the left crossing point at TCross m TCross1pk pk the horizontal peak to peak deviation of the left crossing point at TCross B PCrossI mean the vertical mean of the left crossing point at PCross The T2 values are vertical and horizontal values associated with the rightmost crossing point These areas are used to establish the following directions B TCross2mean the horizontal mean of the right crossing point at TCross gt m TCross2 isma the horizontal standard deviation of the right crossing point at TCross TCross2pk pk the horizontal peak to peak deviation of the right crossing point at TCross2 The DCD values are horizontal values associated with the rightmost crossing point at 50 of the eye height These areas are used to establish the DCDpk pk the horizontal peak to peak deviation of the left crossing point at half the height of the eye CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual i Ae Appendix C Insert Sampling Module User Manuals Here You can insert the User manuals for the electrical and or optical sampling
23. gt 21 ps div 1 ps 1 of interval 0 ps 0 1 of interval CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 2 System Timebase Cont Description v Time internal ac curacy locked to in ternal 10 MHz refer ence mode Horizontal deskew range and resolution Characteristics Strobe placement accuracy for a given horizontal interval and position on same strobe line per table below Contribution from 80E04 sampling module is included in specification Range Time Interval Accuracy 20 ps div 1 ps 1 of interval gt 21 ps div 8 ps 0 01 of interval 500 ps to 100 ns on any individual channel in 1 ps increments 1 Thetotal number of samples contained in a single acquired waveform record memory length in IEEE 1057 2 2 1 80E04 sampling module is included in this specification Table A 3 System Trigger Description Trigger sources Auto normal mode Slope 4 or select High frequency on off select Metastability R eject On Off select Variable trigger hold off range and resolu tion CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Characteristics External Direct Edge Trigger External P recsaled Trigger Internal Clock Trigger and Clock Recovery with appropriately equipped optical modules Normal mode wait for trigger Auto mode Trigger automatically generated after 100 ms time out Edge 4 mode Triggers on positive slewing edge Edge mode Triggers on negat
24. modules here CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual C 1 Appendix C Sampling Module User Manuals C 2 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual ee ANEEEgEENENMNMNMNMNMNMNNMgMgMg223u g Yl Glossary Accuracy The closeness of the indicated value to the true value Acquisition The process of sampling signals from input channels digitizing the samples into data points and assembling the data points into a waveform record The waveform record is stored in memory The trigger marks time zero in that process Active cursor The cursor that moves when you turn the general purpose knob It is represented in the display by a solid line Active or Selected view The view in multiple view displays that is currently targeted for adjustment by the horizontal controls The front panel button of the active view is always lit amber Aliasing A false representation of a signal due to insufficient sampling of high frequencies or fast transitions A condition that occurs when a sampling instrument digitizes at an effective sampling rate that is too slow to reproduce the input signal The waveform displayed on screen may have a lower frequency than the actual input signal Annotations Lines displayed on screen to indicate measurement reference levels and points that an automatic measurement is using to derive the measurement value Attenuation The degree the amplitude of a signal is reduced when it passes through an attenuating device such as a probe
25. modules in place before powering on the instrument 2 Instrument must be powered up 3 Setup the instrument controls as you want them saved m See Sampling Module User Manuals for as part of a recallable setup sampling module installation For help in making your setup check the references at m See Power On Instrument on page 1 12 right and other sections in this chapter specific to the m setup you wish to make m See page 3 23 for acquisition setup m Seepage 3 45 for trigger setup Display the 4 From the application menu bar select File and then File Edi View Setup Utiies Hel Save Setup dia select Save Setup See right EEEN log box Save Waveform tt The Save Setup dialog box allows for the entry of a file Recall Setup i i Recall Waveform name file type and includes a field for adding your ETER comments See below Ep CtrlP Print Setup Recent Hle Save Setup EAE Exit Saeim C3sews si Al ni a8 Current stp ix EveHistagram stp ix FrameScan l stp ix Framescarne stp ix ProtoE wali stp ix ProtoE val 2 stp File name ProtoE vall3 stp Ej save as Hype Setup Files stp Cancel Comment Does TDA on StarComm prototype Help Requires S EU4 sampling module in See Test Spec StarComm TDRUS4 Name a destina 5 Use the Save in drop down list and buttons see right ESEE AE tion to navigate to the directory in which to save your set
26. must rebuild the instrument hard drive This process will return the hard disk to the its original condition present when the instrument shipped Since data and programs you may have installed are lost with this rebuild you should do the Windows 96 Reinstall Only procedure instead if you can See Windows 96 Reinstall Only on page 1 16 If you must rebuild the system hard drive use the set of OS Rebuild CDs 063 349 X X that shipped with the instrument Follow the instructions in the booklet found in the CD case System Diagnostics In case of instrument problems you may wish to run the system diagnostics If so see the procedure Perform the Diagnostics on page 1 20 Window Safe Mode If the instrument is turned off before the operating system boots or if you ve installed a third party product with a driver incompatible with instrument start up Windows 98 will open in Safe mode The touchscreen will be inoperable therefore you must install the standard accessory mouse and keyboard to operate the instrument When you have finished investigating and removed any barrier to Windows start up you can reboot If the instrument no longer boots to Safe mode you can remove the keyboard and mouse if desired CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 1 17 Installation 1 18 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual a ae Incoming Inspection This section contains instructions for performing an incoming inspection of this instrument Perfor
27. stp Choose your setup file by either Filename GByteEtherstp T os TRE iles of type Setu iles s E Cancel wm Clicking an existing name in the file list Radiat eee m Clicking in the File name field and typing a new Access to virtual keyboard name replacing the default file name Tip If your instrument lacks a keyboard touch or click on the icons as indicated right to display a virtual keyboard You can use the mouse or touch screen with the virtual keyboard to type entries in the name fields and comments fields View any in 6 Read the comment associated with the setup you n a cluded com choose if any is present It can contain information about no T eee ment optional using the setup you are about to restore see right pe ears M AO Tip Selecting a file displays any comments that were entered when the setup was saved Comments can help you ascertain the purpose of the setups saved earlier Recall your 7 Click the Recall button to save the setup file To cancel setup without recalling a setup click the Cancel button Tip You can also recall the default setup from this dialog box clicking the Default button recalls the the factory default setup For more 8 For more help on recalling setups click the Help information button in the dialog box to display contextual help on screen See page 3 145 to learn about using online help End of Procedure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manua
28. to acquire NOTE Waveform data outside the vertical acquisition window is clipped that is the data is limited to the minimum and or maximum boundaries of the vertical acquisition window This limiting can cause inaccuracies in amplitude related measurements See Vertical Acquisition Window Considerations on page 3 13 Trigger and Display Set basic trigger controls to gate waveform acquisition and use the display to interactively set scale position and offset waveforms See the sections Triggering on page 3 37 and Displaying Waveforms on page 3 47 Selected Waveform Many of the controls of this instrument especially the vertical controls operate on the selected waveform The instrument applies all actions that only affect one waveform at a time such as applying a changes to the vertical control settings to the selected waveform NOTE You can select a channel waveform a math waveform or a reference waveform The procedures here describe how to select and set up channel waveforms for acquisition See Displaying Waveforms on page 3 47 for information regarding using the controls for adjusting display of reference and math waveforms Flexible Control Access The product provides multiple methods for adjusting acquisition controls This manual focuses on basic setup through the front panel and then through use of the User Interface UI Application displayed full screen CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 7 Acquiring Wave
29. 0 0 cc eee 3 67 Wiat S Excluded A rr 3 67 ReCys OSS rrrTrT 3 67 Measurement Select loli x uar ur wera RUE we eee POCHESTE de ERE awe ee 3 68 Number of Measurements cud uera eee eu sew bases dda oadawe oe 3 68 Me asurerment SOUTCES cua cae sawed eae were Pace PRIORES EE og 3 68 Databases as Sources Behavior 0 cece eee eee ees 3 68 Isid eoo MIRI ID AETCTITICITILITT TO LII LIT LI T 3 68 High Low Tracking Method vase mex RERES4Ax EZ 3 69 Reference Levels Method 44 004 wera ira se eee Pa HE STE S ead awe ee 3 70 DetroutVICIBOdS serrer arran nere d E291 05 54 12 2 9529 3 71 To Fake Automatic Measurements c00e dora are du Ud ao ope aon 3 72 Jo Ebobalize a Measurement ccscuetsceve uude Sarq dou UP oa Hai god 3 75 Taking Cursor VicasureimemMS ace qacdokd uer P gor UP ha a 8 247 3 e apt 3 T WHY USO noccsesedueseTuPd ue Tueue eue pq eS vds d Ud doe Tu OE Rd 3 77 Wid SM aSU U st ons sce ego Tweu eve pq S3 vds V EI VoU T E d 3 T What sources Can L Measure iaa aea uooeue pa x dua Eo E Hao d 3 78 Keys TO Using CUO n dudes dade ues ee ave eara que us d 4 5 8 E dp 3 78 CCULSOP TU DES e vuip das ve vs duos eee Sud Jug queas d ud rd EO qos 3 78 Cursors are DIsplay Lmtlled uiu cete dona sare dau VEO Eh ao 3 78 Cursors Default to the Selected Waveform 3 78 Cursors Can Treat Sources Independently 3 79 Vertical Cursors Measure from the Trigger Point
30. 3 130 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases Overview To edit a mask Cont Related control elements amp resources Selecta 4 Selecta mask to edit from the Mask list This section of mask to edit the Mask Edit dialog box lists all masks available for edit and the number of vertices each mask has 4 vertices 4 vertices Mat Defined Mat Defined Not Defined Mat Defined Not Defined Vertex Vertex Number li E Horizontal Vertical 16 08n E 500 0m aH Add edit or delete 5 Once you have selected a mask use the Vertex section mask vertices of the Mask Edit dialog to add edit or delete individual vertices Use the Vertex Number box to select a vertex number for the selected mask Use the Horizontal and Vertical box controls to set the horizontal and vertical positions of the selected vertex Add Delete Tip You may also drag and drop vertices directly on the mask to new locations Click on the mask on the graticule to select it Vertices are designated with an X Click Add to add a vertex to the selected mask After clicking Add click the location on the selected mask in the graticule where you want to the new vertex added Click Delete to delete the selected vertex from the selected mask Note When you add or delete a vertex the Mask list is updated to show the new number of vertices for each mask Click End Mask Editto close the Mask Edit dial
31. 5 Positive Crossing B 5 Positive Duty Cycle B 5 Positive Width B 5 Quality Factor B 4 Rise Time B 5 RMS B 2 S N Ratio B 4 Measurement accuracy optimizing 3 83 3 88 Measurement level HighRef Glossary 5 LowRef Glossary 6 MidRef Glossary 7 MidRef2 Glossary 7 Measurements amplitude category B 1 area category B 2 Index 6 automatic 3 66 annotations 3 66 databases as sources 3 67 eye pattern and optical 3 67 independent characterization of 3 67 list of supported B 1 statistics on 3 67 what s measured 3 66 why use 3 66 cursor 3 77 sources 3 78 what s measured 3 77 why use 3 77 cursor types 3 78 cursors and the display 3 78 eye pattern optical category B 3 High and Low levels defined B 6 how to localize gates 3 75 how to set sources for cursor 3 82 how to take 3 72 how to take cursor 3 81 levels used in taking B 6 B 7 reference levels defined B 6 reference levels defined eye pattern optical B 7 tools for taking 3 65 Measurements bar 2 6 Measuring Waveforms 3 65 Menu Pop up Glossary 7 Menu bar 2 6 Metastability reject triggering 3 42 Mid measurement B 1 MidRef measurement level Glossary 7 MidRef2 measurement level Glossary 7 Minimum measurement B 2 Mode trigger 3 39 Models instrument 1 1 Modes sampling 3 27 3 29 Modules sampling supported 1 3 Mouse operations equiv
32. 5 Bit error to capture 3 35 Horizontal Bar cursors Glossary 5 delay time Glossary 5 discussion of parameters 3 16 interrelation of parameters 3 17 position 3 7 scaling 3 4 set up procedure 3 8 time range acquisition window Glossary 5 Horizontal Reference usage limitations 3 30 Horizontal acquisition window Glossary 5 control set up 3 9 what determines 3 16 Horizontal delay defined 3 27 Horizontal position relative to Horizontal Ref 3 53 Horizontal reference relative to horizontal position 3 53 Horizontal reference point Glossary 5 Horizontal scale why use 3 4 Horizontal set up purpose 3 4 Horizontal settings with channel waveforms 3 52 with math waveforms 3 52 with reference waveforms 3 52 Incoming inspection 1 19 perform compensation 1 21 perform diagnostics 1 20 perform hardware and operating system test 1 32 perform the functional tests 1 23 test equipment required by 1 19 Infinite Persistence display mode 3 60 Initialize Glossary 6 Input Output front panel map 2 10 Input Output rear panel map 2 11 Inspection and cleaning exterior 3 153 flat panel display 3 153 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Index Installation 1 7 environmental requirements 1 7 incoming inspection procedure 1 19 sampling modules 1 8 compensation requirements 1 9 software installation 1 15 Instrument accessories list 1 35 ac
33. 5 Glossary 2 How to execute 3 97 how to execute 3 11 mask specific 3 124 overview 3 13 Average acquisition mode Glossary 2 Average Optical Power measurement B 3 B Back up procedure 1 15 Bandwidth Glossary 2 Bar Controls 2 6 Measurements 2 6 Menu 2 6 Readouts 2 6 Status 2 6 Tool 2 6 Waveform 2 6 Index 2 BER Glossary 2 BER floor Glossary 2 Bit error Glossary 2 Burst Width measurement B 5 Button SELECT Glossary 8 C CD instrument software 1 3 Certifications for instrument A 9 Channel Glossary 2 icon Glossary 2 number Glossary 2 waveforms Glossary 3 Channel icon Glossary 2 Channel probe deskew Glossary 2 Channels in sampling modules 3 26 maximum configuration 1 10 shared horizontal window 3 19 shared parameters illustrated 3 19 Cleaning instrument how to 3 153 Cleaning and inspection exterior 3 153 flat panel display 3 153 Clipping 3 6 Clock internal Glossary 6 Clock recovery 3 37 trigger source 3 39 Communication remote 3 121 Compensation 3 83 3 88 how to perform 3 84 when installing moving sampling modules 1 9 Configuration instrument 1 7 maximum channels available 1 10 software installation 1 15 Connectors DIRECT 3 39 3 41 locations and purpose 1 11 PRESCALE 3 39 3 41 Contacting Tektronix xv Controls initialize Glossary 6 knob Glossary
34. A single channel 50 GHz sampling module m 30E02 A dual channel 12 5 GHz 50 Q sampling module with low noise m 80E03 A dual channel 20 GHz sampling module This model provides the same features as 80E04 but without the TDR step generator m 80E04 A dual channel 20 GHz TDR sampling module The TDR step generator provides 35 ps reflected step risetime Voltage polarity can be reversed on either step to provide true differential TDR Other Modules M 350A01 Trigger Prescale Limiting Preamplifier Module A single channel module providing 8 14 GHz AC coupled 50 Q limiting preamplification It increases the sensitivity of the prescale trigger input of the 8000 Series instruments to x 200 MVpk pk 1 4 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual ee ee Check the Package Contents Verify that you have received all of the parts of your instrument You should verify that you have B the main instrument B all the standard accessories for the main instrument NOTE Standard accessories are listed in Table 1 3 on page 1 35 m the correct power cords for your geographical area B the OS Rebuild CDs 063 3491 XX and Product Software CD 063 3492 X X that include an installation copy of the software installed on the instrument and all files needed to rebuild your instrument operating system if necessary Store the CDs in a safe location where you can easily retrieve them for maintenance purposes NOTE Keep the certificate of
35. Depth 787 mm 31 0 in EC Declaration of Conformity Meets intent of Directive 89 336 EEC for Electromagnetic Compatibility when configured with EMC sampling head modules designed for use with this instrument as identified in this manual Compliance was demonstrated to the following specifications as listed in the Official J ournal of the European Union EN 61326 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual EMC Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement Control and Laboratory use A 9 Appendix A Specifications Table A 9 Certifications and compliances cont Category Australia New Zealand Declaration of Conformity EMC General EMC EC Declaration of Conformity Low Voltage U S Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Listing mainframe Canadian Certification mainframe A 10 Standards or description Class A Radiated and Conducted Emissions IEC 1000 4 2 Performance Criterion B1 2 IEC 1000 4 3 Performance Criterion A1 IEC 1000 4 4 Performance Criterion B1 IEC 1000 4 5 Performance Criterion B1 IEC 1000 4 6 Performance Criterion A1 IEC 1000 4 11 Performance Criterion B1 1 Performance Criteria C for USB keyboard and mouse Note that operation of the USB keyboard and mouse can be restored by unplugging and then reconnecting the USB connector at the rear panel of the main instrument Horizontal timing susceptibility of the optical sampling modules and their internal clock recovery trigger signals
36. Hist Setup dialog box to completely specify the histogram box on the waveform in waveform units or as a percent of the graticule For quick edits you can use can use the mouse or touchscreen to drag to resize and reposition the box directly on the screen Any Waveform or database as Source Histograms can be taken on all channel math and reference waveforms You can also take a histogram on either one of the two waveform databases this instrument provides CSAS000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases Continuous Operation The histogram you set up can run and its results be displayed even if you turn off display of the histogram or of the waveform selected as its source Histogram data is continuously accumulated and displayed until you explicitly turn it off or clear the waveform data of the histogram source What s Excluded Histograms longer than 500 bins Histograms are limited to the on screen resolution limiting horizontal sizes of 500 bins Multiple histograms One histogram can be displayed on one source at a time The source can be any waveform in any of the three Views Main Magl or Mag2 Keys to Using The key points that follow describe operating considerations for setting up the Histograms histograms so that they best support your data analysis tasks Histogram Counting Stays On Once you check Enable Histogram in the Histogram Setup dialog histogram counting starts and continues
37. Level Performing a dark level calibration will maximize the accuracy of the extinction and User Wavelength Gain ratio and other optical automatic measurements you take Performing a User Compensations Wavelength Gain compensation will optimize an optical channel for your custom input signal Use the following procedure to perform either compensation this procedure applies only to optical modules Overview To perform optical compensations Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must be installed with at least one optical sampling modules to be dark level calibrated in place The acquisition system should be set to run continuously See the sampling module User Manuals for sampling module installation De Select the 2 Use the Vertical buttons to select the channel to be waveform compensated Az CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 87 Measuring Waveforms Overview To perform optical compensations Cont Control elements and resources Access 3 dark level com pensation Run the dark 4 level compensa tion From the application menu bar click Setup and then click Vertical See right In Vert Setup dialog box click the Dark Level button under Compensation See right Follow the instructions on screen Repeat steps 2 and 4 for any additional optical channels you want to compensate Run the user If you want you can can compensate an optical channel for w
38. M each Mag time base position setting locates the aperture within the Main time base M each Mag time base graticule displays across its full horizontal width 10 divisions the contents of the aperture See To Display Waveforms in a Mag View on page 3 57 for a procedure that demonstrates this operating characteristic Horizontal Position and the Horizontal Reference The time values you set for horizontal position are from the trigger point to the horizontal reference point This is not the time from the trigger point to the start of the waveform record unless you set the horizontal reference to 0 See Figure 3 17 Trigger point 50 ms max Horizontal position 7 Horizontal delay 19 ns min Time Time of first point Horizontal Time of last point zero reference point Figure 3 17 Horizontal position includes time to Horizontal Reference NOTE The time from the trigger to the time of the first point sampled is the horizontal delay Note that horizontal delay is set indirectly by the horizontal position and horizontal reference settings Time of first point Horizontal Position 10 divs x horizontal scale in sec div x Horizontal Reference 100 Mouse and Touchscreen Operation This instrument ships with a mouse and keyboard to give you more options for instrument control However for some installations you might not have sufficient work space to install the mouse or ke
39. Measurement Mast Histag s Cursors Viti Database TDR Select normal 3 From the Display Setup dialog box see right choose Set Interpolation mode style vectors Normal to select a display with no acquisition data Style and interpola persistence Check for Normal display Nema tion Check for vectors gt Show Vectors Waveforms display with the new data from ongoing acquisitions replacing that data in the same time intervals slots but acquired as part of the last previous waveform Interpolation Sinz Variable Persistence Time 200 0 EL C Infinite Persistence Check Vectors to turn on display lines between waveform dots uncheck to display only dots Select an Interpolation mode from the pulldown list Choose from Sin x x Linear or None CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 61 Displaying Waveforms Overview To set display styles Cont Related control elements and resources Selecta 6 From the the Setup Display dialog box see right Style persistence choose s Mode ow Vectors m Infinite Persistence to make data persist until Ame sin fl you change some control such as scale factor or explicitly clear the data Waveform displays accumulate data as new waveform records acquire resulting in a build up of data in all time slots Variable Persistence Set Variable s Poss gis Persistence time C Infinite Persistence Variab
40. SPeClal uu oervesprva ue rV E eee se d psu Pd EE IUD S goa d 3 139 Wia Sq xEIdetl cedutaspirvevie qud ue ds 409 90 9 Suv Rp 1 d EUR P a se dre pd 3 139 IRCICICNC os as SOURCES europa ves u59 qur 9 ouch de d EUR B dr apu 3 139 More than two waveform databases 0c cece eee eee 3 139 Interpolation or vector displays zov Rr deae 3 140 KO STO SI aav ewevUe Sauver Re pU Sd X 9 4 595 9 SX ad 1 3 140 DIMO ONS 5 oc M 3 140 l coo 3 140 To Set Up a Waveform Database a 4cese uda dare dw UD E aoa 3 141 To Customize the Database Display oc ose sees or aod hao 3 143 Accessing Online Help 2 5 dka EPA RE PRI ERE EE 3 145 What s Available ceeeeeeeeeeeee eh 3 145 Wily WISE 246455 eu tet ebeareeee eae te keede a eee a hee eee bee 3 145 Keys tO Using iie scs e604 2488460846648 edo RR E EORR do 3 145 How to Use Online Help 0 0 0 0 Ie 3 146 Cleaning the Instrument ccc cece ccc ccc cece eee eccees 3 153 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Table of Contents iD dres abi lg MRTF 3 153 Flat panel Display Ge aD oe sirene ceo keene seedew eed es Jaca ec id 3 153 Appendices Appendix A Specifications ccc cece ec wc cece eee nnn A 1 unico SET A 9 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported B 1 Amplitude Measure mems sacras paci gc mom suse ea bases dev ecu s bu ca B 1 Ar VISAS NIO
41. Saved Yes Yes Yes Measurements if selected from Measurements toolbar use the selected waveform as the measurement target Yes Yes Yes If cursors are off pushing the Cursor button on the front panel turns cursors on with the selected waveform as their target Yes Dragging a box around a portion of the selected waveform adjusts horizontal scale to fill the screen with the boxed portion see Quick adjust the time base on page 3 56 Graticules One graticule is displayed for the Main time base and an additional eraticule is displayed for each Mag time base that you turn on Figure 3 16 on page 3 48 shows the elements of the time base graticules the elements are the same for each time base displayed Using Multiple Views The methods of displaying turning on and selecting any time base view follow M Turn the view on Press the Mag or Mag2 front panel button once to turn on the Magl or Mag2 time base The Main view is always displayed you cannot turn it off Turning on a time base makes it active selects it for adjustment m Select among displayed views Press any time base view button to make it the active selected time base The button of the selected view is always lit amber M Turn off the selected Mag view Once selected press the Mag or Mag2 button to turn off the time base The Main time base becomes the selected time base Operations on the Selected Time Base View The method of adjusting horizont
42. T3 EI ETE H2 Clear Reference s Ei EI Select references Select All Deselect All e End of Procedure 3 115 Data Input and Output Exporting Waveforms and Histograms This instrument also supports export of a waveform or histogram to a file The instrument exports the data as comma separated ASCII text Why Use By exporting a waveform or a histogram you can use it with other analysis y exp 8 8 y y tools such as spreadsheets or math analysis applications Keys to Using The key points that describe operating considerations for setting up the exporting of waveforms and histograms follow Waveforms export as a series of comma separated values CSV which are amplitudes without units There s no timing information but data is placed in the file in sequence from first sample in waveform record to the last m Histograms also export as a series of comma separated values CSV which are values without units One value is present for each bin in the histogram M Because the waveforms are exported as CSV without timing and scaling information the instrument does not import these waveforms directly If you intend to recall a waveform later save it see the procedure 7o Save Your Waveform on page 3 109 instead of exporting it You cannot import histograms M You may also choose to copy a waveform and paste directly into some applications such as Microsoft Word or Excel If so select your waveform a
43. TO USING 455505 cosccuu eie PUE BP APPEARS Pee id PES D 3 124 Mask Standards and Masks 0 eee eens 3 124 Mask SII REEL D OTT LOT DUI TT 3 125 Mask SONIEEERILTTCOTETIOTDO OI 0T 1 T TTE 3 125 To Mask Test a Waveform uaoaacasaeesasc ny waevwesas esa sad 3 127 TOGIRGINIGSR ssa eausa maru ERI NE PE DI UIUESE GERENTE 3 130 Counting Masks 22442 lt 400 050500 Eu ERO bee PM Es2dASS ipid EE 3 132 JoCreate a New Mask 52unce cr o coder RR EUR P ANO RASA se 3 133 Takits FHSIOPDOIHS os cae en wow on waa uud ves ra EE PETEEPERTERE MES TE 3 134 DU ZS Un 3 134 bru ii e rpA T rrr 3 134 Flexible Histogram Editing Sua auem sees SRHESTRSE REPERTA 3 134 Any Waveform or database as Source 0 0 cece eee eee 3 134 Continuous Operation uua sem or xy E PWEESE SR SERA 3 135 What S Excluded uu sssdcrica week sd c ee OR on RE dS EH awe ee 3 135 Keys to Using Histograms 2 4csuwvaske vascos wPeTEWEPASOSPERATATE 3 135 Histogram Counting Stays On 2 cecceuese sews bau ee dda cadawe se 3 135 Histogram SIZO a2 caw easdw suse ees em PRU SE GUESS E 3 135 Recalling DEUS use tee eee sa ee meee bases an oadana TE 3 135 TO Take a ISOC at aoa soon a oon ee Beem PEE De UE SEGUE RENNES E 3 136 Histogram SIdLHS LIOS eere ve denso eee adu bgdd pasen ded s Qui Peau d 3 138 Using Waveform Databases uua ec acer vx Ex ES Pu E PRI ERE RNAT 3 139 b WSC rTrore 3 139 WOES
44. Waveform Databases M Masks are saved with setups so you can save sets of masks by defining them and then storing the instrument setup Displayed masks are overwrit ten when you recall a stored setup select a standard mask or initialize the instrument To Mask Test a Waveform Use the procedure that follow to set up the instrument to mask test a waveform against a mask standard or user defined mask set Overview To Mask Test a Waveform Related Control Elements and Resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument musthave at least on waveform turned on See Display Waveforms on page 3 47 for information on displaying waveforms Access the Mask 2 Select Mask from the Setup menu to display the Mask Setup Utilities Help Setup dialog box Setup dialog box Vertical Horizontal Acquire Trigger Measurement Display Hicker arn CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 127 Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases Overview Select the mask 3 source and turn on a mask Adjust the mask 6 Autoset the wave 8 form to mask 3 128 Select the waveform to be mask tested from the drop down list under Source Use the Comm Standard drop down list to select a Standard or user defined mask See Table 3 9 on page 3 124 fora list of available standard masks Selecting a communication standard or user defined mask automatically m displays the mask on screen and autosets for the mask if Automati
45. a waveform that you want to recall Select your 4 If not selected select wfm in the Files of type field to waveform force the dialog box file listing to only include these types Use wfm for waveforms Tip Only change the type if you wantto temporarily see any other types of files in the current directory Otherwise leave it set at wfm Fieneme MainCt win Files of type Waveform files wim wdb v Close Choose your waveform file by either T m Clicking an existing name in the file list Access to virtual keyboard m Clicking in the File name field and typing a new name replacing the default file name Tip If your instrument lacks a keyboard touch or click on the icons as indicated right to display a virtual keyboard You can use the mouse or touch screen with the virtual keyboard to type entries in the File name and Files of type boxes View any 6 Read the comment associated with the waveform file Comment Output 4 Test Seq A04 TP 101 Hep included com you choose if a comment is present It can contain Recorded 2 9 00 By Alex T Evans ATE ment optional information that help you use the waveform you are about to restore see right Becalino nzempy Z reference Tip Selecting a file displays any comments that were entered when the waveform was saved CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 113 Data Input and Output Overview To recall a waveform Cont Control
46. as a basis for editing Use the procedure that follows Overview To edit a mask Related control elements amp resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must have atleast on waveform turned on and the Mask Setup dialog box displayed See Display Waveforms on page 3 47 for information on displaying waveforms Selecta mask 2 Next you need to select and enable a standard mask STIS set To start with a standard mask pull down the Main C1 4 I Enable Mask can Comm Standard list and choose a standard mask To ss create a mask from scratch or edit an existing OC STM 0 user defined mask select User in the Comm Standard iU ee eae ee lt ti l Fiber Channel Electrical OL 9 selection list C Other gt DCA2 5THM4 User OC 18 m DUL 24 OC 36 UC 48 5TM 15 DC 132 5TM B4 Open Mask 3 Click Mask Edit to display the Mask Edit dialog box te X Edit dialog box e Wm Database Hist Cursor Meas Note The Mask Setup dialog box and Mask Edit dialog Vet Hoz Aca Trig box are both within the Mask tab Use the Edit Mask EN Era aa and End Mask Edit buttons to toggle back and forth between the two Mask dialog boxes 4 Vertices Mask 3 4 Vertices Mask 4 Not Defined Mask 5 Not Defined Mask 6 Not Defined Mask Not Defined Mask 8 Not Defined Vertex Vertex Number fi a Horizontal Vertical 16 086 500 0m aH Add Delete End Mask Edit Help
47. before rearming its trigger circuit after acquiring a sample Before rearming the trigger circuitry cannot recognize when the next trigger conditions are satisfied and so cannot generate the next trigger event When the instrument is triggering on undesired trigger events such as shown in Figure 3 14 top waveform you adjust holdoff to obtain stable triggering as shown in Figure 3 14 bottom waveform CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Triggering Holdoff Holdoff Holdoff THA uL nu mu O Indicates trigger points Holdoff Holdoff Holdoff Holdoff 77 JUL TOUL UL Atthe longer holdoff time for the top waveform triggering occurs at valid but undesired trigger events With a shorter holdoff set for the bottom waveform triggers all occur on the first pulse in the burst which results in a stable display Figure 3 14 Holdoff adjustment can prevent false triggers Usable Holdoff The holdoff time the instrument can use varies within limits The maximum holdoff the instrument can achieve is the 50 ms specified in Specifica tion on page Table A 3 on page A 3 The minimum holdoff used depends on hardware constraints which do not change and certain control settings which you can control B The instrument hardware constrains the minimum usable holdoff time to the greater of the trigger to end of record time or 5 us m The trigger to end of record time EORT is the time from the trigger event to the last sample in the wav
48. before verifying functions If you make changes to these settings other than those called out in the procedure you may obtain invalid results In this case go back to step 1 and repeat the procedure Verify Electrical Input Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls Channels Equipment One SMA cable such as Tektronix part number 174 1427 00 required Prerequisites At least one electrical 80E00 series sampling module must be installed as outlined in its user manual 1 Initialize the instrument Push the front panel DEFAULT SETUP button CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 1 23 Incoming Inspection 1 24 2 Set the Trigger System In the UI application toolbar select Internal Clock from the Trig list box as shown below Tekironk Trig External Direct e ov EE External Direct H E sternal Prescaler internal Clock Clack Recover h 3 Hook up the signal source Connect the SMA cable from the DC CALIBRA TION output to the channel input that you want to test as shown in Figure 1 7 below CSA8000 TDS 8000 SMA cable from DC calibration output to 80E00 C3 input Figure 1 7 Hookup for electrical functional tests 4 Set the DC CALIBRATOR OUTPUT a Push the Vertical MENU front panel button This displays the Vert Setup dialog box b Enter a level of 200 m in the DC CAL box c Push the Vertica
49. clockwise rotation contracts it and returning the horizontal scale to 1 us div returns the period to about five divisions Leave the time base set to 1 us div m The horizontal POSITION knob positions the signal left and right on screen when rotated NOTE The signal will not move past the minimum position setting Ele Edit Miew Setup Utilities Help Triggered aveforms 9511 Tektronis 5 xl al gt amp A Rir c Run stop Aca Made 5 ample Trig intemal Clock 7 po E siTe Amplitude nun nn ca sur an ane sov nn ir vo re so 5 z TE la ES mu m z ik Erni di Wavetorm C3 20 00m Widi SST Internal Clock gt ind RO po Control bar Mes 4 20 00mwv aH pov EL main Q amp 1 000055 aH 18 00ns aH 5 05 PM 4 7 00 Vertical scale Horizontal setting scale setting Figure 1 13 Main time base verification 6 Set up the Magl time base a Push the Horizontal View MAGI button on the front panel The Magl time base view will display under the Main time base view b Set the Horizontal SCALE to 1 us div The horizontal scale readout is displayed in the Control bar at the bottom of the graticule and is now reading out the scale of the Mag time base view 1 30 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Incoming Inspection 7 Verify that the Magl time base operates Confirm the following statements M The brackets on the Main V
50. dialog box push Acquisition MENU to display m Run Stop Button Only sets the instrument to start and stop the acquisition only when you use the Run Stop button which is available on the front panel on the application toolbar and in the Acquisition Setup dialog box If toggled to Run acquisition will start if a valid trigger occurs If toggled to Stop acquisition stops immediately BM Condition in addition to Run Stop Button which can always stop acquisition the stop after control provides additional conditions you can select from to stop an acquisition See step 4 Set the Stop Mode and Action on page 3 24 or access the online help in the Acquisition Setup dialog box for more information Global Controls Like the horizontal controls the acquisition controls apply to all active channels For example channel 1 cannot acquire in Sample mode while channel 2 acquires in Envelope mode you cannot stop channel 8 from acquiring 1f turned on while other channels continue to acquire Unlike horizontal controls acquisition settings extend across time bases you cannot set a different sample mode for channels acquired in the Magl time base the sample mode you set extends across the Main Mag and Mag2 time bases CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 21 Acquiring Waveforms Preventing Aliasing Under certain conditions a waveform may be aliased on screen Read the following description about aliasing and the suggestions for pre
51. example the sources are grayed out because a source was just entered You must enter an operator before entering another source Use the backspace button to remove the last entry use the clear key to remove the entire expression and start over Use parentheses to group terms in the expression to control execution order for example 5 C1 C2 Use the filter controls in the dialog box to apply a filter to the math waveform defined by the expression Here are some guidelines m Num Avgs Setthe number of averages applied by the Avg function Only affect waveforms if the Avg function is used Filter Risetime Setto limit risetime to improve TDR measurement results Filter Mode Choose Centered or Shifted for causal or noncausal filtering To define a math waveform Cont Related control elements amp resources Define Math Math waveform Math Ext Define Math r Math Waveform m1 On Math Expression C1 m Functions ntal Di Expl Sources C1 C2 C3 C4 Gh Ce 7 Eg Num Ayvgs Filter Risetime Filter Mode Centered 2 aH 1 000ns E 5 Bl RZ Re RA nie mies bate BE m Measurement Scalars OK m Math Waveform Apply Cancel Help Expl Loaf Sqrt Versus Ava M inf Math Expression m1 Jv an C1 r Functions Sources Inta Diff Vmaa Filter
52. following chapters Getting Started shows you how to configure and install your instrument and provides an incoming inspection procedure Operating Basics uses maps to describe the various interfaces for controlling the instrument including the front panel and the software user interface These maps provide overviews of the product and its functions from several viewpoints Reference comprises an encyclopedia of topics see Overview on page 3 1 that describe the instrument interface and features and that give background and basic information on how to use them The online help onboard the instrument application describes the interface features and their usage in more detail detailed descriptions of all programming commands are found in the CSA8000 amp TDSS000 Programmer Online Guide manual Appendices provides additional information including the specifications and automatic measurement definitions Related Manuals and Online Documents This manual is part of a document set of standard accessory manuals and online documentation this manual mainly focuses on installation and background needed to use the product features See the following list for other documents CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual xiii Preface Supporting instrument operation and service Manual part numbers are listed in Table 1 3 on page 1 35 Manual name CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Online Help CSA8000 amp TDS8000 References 80E01 80E02 80E03
53. in the same sequence found in the bit stream M Triggering is synchronous with the bit streams framing signal of the communication signal you want to scan which results in the acquisition of a single sample prior the scanning of the next bit You must supply an external trigger source that is synchronous with the frame possible sources are external frame trigger sync signals from a pattern generator or from a BERT Bit Error Rate Tester Acquisition operates in a scanning mode where a horizontal position is set to acquire the first bit which the acquisition system acquires as a subframe see Figure 3 10 on page 3 31 b horizontal position is incremented one bit period 1 bit rate and then the acquisition system acquires the second bit as a subframe The duration of each subframe acquisition is set to provide about a 20 overlap between frames c This sequence of incrementing and then acquiring the next bit continues until the instrument acquires the number of bits you specify CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Acquiring Waveforms for the frame or until acquisition stops due to a specific test condition such as the failure of a mask test The resulting horizontally skewed FrameScan acquisitions display successive individual bits acquired in increasing time order FrameScan acquisitions can continue through an entire frame of data if needed to help you to uncover faulty bit sequences leading up to pattern depen
54. installed access the virtual keyboard and use the touch screen to enter values CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual To gate a measurement Related control elements and resources 1 See To Take an Automatic Measurement on page 3 23 Setup Utilities Help Trig Vertical Horizontal Acquire Trigger Maszk l uznlan Access to virtual keyboard Souc C Source Getto Default Source Adgion HiLow RefLevel Gates ss 20 0 Eus Vary to position gates Ri oa po Check to display gates Edaes 3 75 Measuring Waveforms Overview To gate a measurement Cont Related control elements and resources Gate Gl Gate G2 End of Procedure 3 76 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Measuring Waveforms Taking Cursor Measurements Why Use Use cursors to measure amplitude and time quickly and with more accuracy than when using graticule measurements Because you position cursors wherever you want on the waveform they are easier to localize to a waveform segment or feature than automatic measurements What s Measured Time or amplitude or both Vertical cursors measure time or bits on screen horizontal cursors measure amplitude voltage watts rho or ohms and waveform cursors measure both Table 3 6 expands on these definitions Table 3 6 Cursor functions types Cursor function T Horizontal Cursors Trigger point Ve
55. intervals In the above calculation N 2 Current sample count 1 For example if taking the 6 sample in the waveform record 5 sample intervals are added 5 The instrument takes one sample for each waveform record channel for each active on timebase This instrument sequentially samples one sample is taken per trigger for each active channel in each displayed timebase 6 If averaging or enveloping is on each record becomes part of a multi acquisition record that these modes produce see page 3 20 The process loops back to step 3 above to acquire additional records until the number of acquisitions required for the acquisition mode currently set are processed and then processing continues as for step 8 below 7T lfFrameScan mode is on the acquisition process is modified See FrameScan Acquisitions on page 3 29 for information on how FrameS can works 8 Atthis point the acquisition record is in channel acquisition memory and is available to the instrument for measurement of its parameters display output and so on The instrument then checks for user specified stop condition and either returns to its idle state or continues at step 3 according to what it finds CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual ee 3g User Interface Map Complete Control and Display Menu Bar Access to data 1 0 printing online help system and set up functions Tool Bar Handy access to key features including the setup dialogs acquisition
56. location in the data stream the input signal that the waveform record is taken Clock Recovery If you use optical sampling modules that include a clock recov ery option you can use the clock embedded in certain optical signals to trigger the instrument The key points that follow describe operating considerations for setting up to trigger on your waveforms Triggering Process When a trigger event occurs the instrument acquires a sample in the process of building a waveform record The trigger event esta CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 37 Triggering 3 38 blishes the time zero point in the waveform record and all samples are measured with respect to that event The trigger event starts waveform acquisition A trigger event occurs when the trigger source the signal that the trigger circuit monitors passes through a specified voltage level in a specified direction the trigger slope When a trigger event occurs the instrument acquires one sample of the input signal When the next trigger event occurs the instrument acquires the next sample This process continues until the entire record is filled with acquired samples Without a trigger the instrument does not acquire any samples See Figure 3 9 on page 3 28 This behavior differs from that of real time acquisition systems which can acquire a complete waveform record from a single trigger event Triggering is Global The instrument uses the trigger event to acqui
57. markings on the product Consult the product manual for further ratings information before making connections to the product Do not apply a potential to any terminal including the common terminal that exceeds the maximum rating of that terminal Do Not Operate Without Covers Do not operate this product with covers or panels removed Use Proper Fuse Use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product Avoid Exposed Circuitry Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is present Wear Eye Protection Wear eye protection if exposure to high intensity rays or laser radiation exists Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures If you suspect there is damage to this product have it inspected by qualified service personnel Do Not Operate in Wet Damp Conditions Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual xi General Safety Summary Symbols and Terms A A Rackmount installations A xii Provide Proper Ventilation Refer to the manual s installation instructions for details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation Terms in this Manual These terms may appear in this manual WARNING Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result in injury or loss of life CAUTION Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to this product or other property
58. modes triggering modes File Edit View pe Utiles Help Triggered Waveforms 0 Tektronix 2 XJ and online help Acq Mode S ample Trid External Direct b 0v EJ 5oz N Measurements Bar Quick p nm nno in a ar E S rro E laa 8 access to the automated measurements by category click measurement buttons to Waveform C3 100 0mVediv l 100 0m Vidiv ELLIZNMK measure the selected waveform 1 1418s t2 1 554ps Display Live reference and Fete math waveforms display here along with cursors masks etc to analyze them Waveform Bar Access to waveform selection click waveform position drag Lm and waveform properties right click Controls Bar Quick access 93cs oov mj 000v mE main A ooon mI ss A 12 15 PM 3 20 00 to waveforms and timebases for display and to their scale offset and position controls for adjustment CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Status Bar Trigger status and waveform count Readout Bar Toggle individual readouts on and off by clicking its button A Readout Right click any readout to display a short cut menu providing handy access to often used setup controls and properties for the feature associated with the readout Readouts Display up to five readouts in this area selectable from the Readout Bar 2 7 ee A Front Panel Map Quick Access to Most Often Used Features Turn knob to adjust most control fields in setup dia
59. of waveforms that it acquires Figure 3 24 shows this concept Channel waveform Math expression Math waveform function source M1 l Figure 3 24 Functional transformation of an acquired waveform CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 89 Creating Math Waveforms Why Use Create math waveforms to support the analysis of your channel and reference waveforms By combining and transforming source waveforms and other data into math waveforms you can derive the data view that your application requires You can create math waveforms that result from m mathematical operations on one or several waveforms or measurements add subtract multiply and divide m function transforms of waveforms such as integrating differentiating and so on You can create up to eight math waveforms see Keys to Using on page 3 91 for more examples What s Special Some features of note follow Functions Powerful functions such as integrate differentiate average can be taken on single waveforms or more complicated expressions Measurement Scalars The results scalars from automatic measurements can be used in expressions For example you can use the measurement Mean on a waveform and subtract from the original waveform the scalar that results to define a new math waveform What s Excluded Some operations that you cannot use with math waveforms follow m Math on Math You cannot use math waveforms as sources for other math wavef
60. only way to assign a new waveform is to change the waveform source of Databasel or Database2 in the same dialog box which releases its existing source If both databases are assigned and you attempt to implicitly assign a waveform source to a database for example by right clicking a waveform icon in the Waveform bar and selecting color grading the instrument will display a notice that no databases are available CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 139 Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases 3 140 Keys to Using NOTE The above exclusion does not mean that a waveform database cannot be used by multiple systems or features For example you can use the same database as the source for a histogram an automatic measurement and a mask test Interpolation or vector displays Waveform database accumulation is always a dot mode accumulation therefore no interpolation or vectoring is performed The key points that follow describe operating considerations for setting up a waveform database Dimensions Waveform database dimensions match those of the database source and are described as follows m Horizontal columns Always 500 columns which is the maximum horizontal graticule view size Columns are in horizontal units that match the horizontal units of the source Vertical rows Always 402 rows which is the maximum vertical graticule size plus one row each for overrange OR and underrange UR Rows are in ver
61. position Sample interval 7L 4 First sampled and digitized point Trigger event on Ext trigger signal Horizontal SS SO Ce r mye LLLA lt Horizontal d Pe delay window Time of first point Figure 3 4 Horizontal acquisition window definition M The record length along with the horizontal scale you set for the 10 divi sion window determines the sample interval horizontal point spacing or resolution on the waveform NOTE The horizontal position controls the distance to the Horizontal Reference to indirectly set the time to the first sampled point See Horizontal Position and the Horizontal Reference on page 3 53 for a discussion of this relationship Horizontal Scale vs Record Length vs Sample Interval vs Resolution These parameters all relate to each other and specify the horizontal acquisition window CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 17 Acquiring Waveforms 3 18 Because the horizontal acquisition window must fit in the 10 horizontal division display for most cases you just set the duration of the horizontal acquisition window 10 divs x the scale setting as described in 1 below By also setting a record length in samples you indirectly set the resolution sample interval sample rate for the horizontal acquisition window waveform record The relations between these horizontal elements follow 1 Time Duration seconds 10 divs window s
62. right corner of the UI application to expose the desktop 2 Right click on the desktop and select Properties from the menu that pops up 3 Select the Settings tab in the Display Properties dialog box 4 Select High Color in the Colors list box CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Data Input and Output 5 Click the OK button to apply your changes If a confirmation box appears click its OK button 6 Click the TDS CSA8000 button in the Windows toolbar to return the UI application to the screen NOTE If you print the screen infrequently you may want to return the colors setting to 256 colors except when printing To return to 256 colors repeat the procedure above but select 256 colors in step 4 Remote Communication Remote communication is performed through the GPIB interface Consult the online Programmer Guide for help with establishing remote communication and control of the instrument To access the Programmer Guide select Programmer Guide in the Help menu from the front screen CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 121 Data Input and Output 3 122 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual a ee Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases The instrument comes equipped with statistical tools to help you display test and evaluate waveforms This section describes these tools and how you use them m Mask Testing Waveforms on page 3 123 describes how you can use standard or user defined masks to set up t
63. the display parameters Multiple Time base Views Three views Main plus Mag and Mag2 can be displayed simultaneously each with its own time base Live waveforms are acquired independently in each time base C1 in Main is a different waveform than C1 in Mag or Mag2 All the displayed waveforms appear in each view that you display if C1 and MI are displayed in Main they also appear in Magl and Mag2 if you display those views Reference waveforms will appear in all views as well but since they have a static time base setting the time base setting with which they were saved they will be identical in all views Fast Access to Zoom Waveform inspection has never been easier Just click and drag a box around the feature of interest and it zooms horizontally to fill the screen reacquired at a higher resolution Preview Mode The instrument automatically uses a preview display when control changes initiate reacquisition of waveform data A preview display shows how the waveforms will look when acquisition completes When the instrument finishes the processing of state changes it removes the preview and displays the actual waveforms What s Excluded Previewing of changes does not occur when the acquisition system is stopped the data will not update on screen until acquisition is restarted CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 49 Displaying Waveforms Keys to Using The key points that follow describe operating considerations for
64. to setup without having to first manually record your settings and then manually set them This capability is helpful when you want to M save and recall a setup that optimizes the instrument for displaying and analyzing a certain signal M save a series of setups to help automate a procedure through recall of a sequence of saved setups as part of performance of the procedure B export a setup for sharing with a second instrument Some features of note follow CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 101 Data Input and Output 3 102 What s Excluded Keys to Using Commenting The Save Setup and the Recall Setup dialog boxes provide for including and viewing comments with your saved setups That way you can store information readable upon recall that describes each setup you save and its intended application Virtual Keyboarding If you do not have a keyboard connected you can still enter comments and name setup files The Save and Recall Setup dialog boxes include the Virtual Keyboard button shown left When you touch or click it the instrument displays a virtual keyboard on screen that you can use with your mouse or the touch screen to enter the setup path name setup file name and comment The instrument excludes the following items when saving setups m Waveforms in channels C1 C8 or references R1 R8 Control settings scale position and so on are saved but not the waveform data Upon recall of the setup th
65. to the Trigger DIRECT input may affect trigger level range resolution and units as follows M Trigger level units will match those of the probe M The trigger level for probes that have offset control is adjusted by changing the offset of the connected probe and is limited by the range resolution and offset characteristics of the probe m When a connected probe is removed and a different probe installed the instrument attempts to keep the same absolute trigger level as the current trigger level setting Note that the probe parameters range resolution offset scale and units that are relevant to the trigger circuit affect the Trigger Level control High Frequency Triggering and Metastability Reject These two features can help stabilize triggering M When you enable the High Frequency triggering control the instrument increases trigger sensitivity of the trigger circuit by decreasing hysteresis a transition or noise band allowing triggering on higher frequency signals m When you enable Metastability Reject the instrument replaces the acquired sample with a null sample if it detects a potential metastable condition A metastable condition occurs when both the trigger input signal and the holdoff generated enable signal arrive at the internal trigger recognizer at virtually the same time Adjusting Holdoff Trigger holdoff can also help stabilize triggering When you adjust holdoff the instrument changes the time it waits
66. without them using the front panel controls and the touchscreen 3 Connect the power cord 4 If you have an external monitor connect the power cord and power on the monitor 5 Turn the Power switch on at the rear panel See Figure 1 4 on page 1 12 for switch location 6 Push the On Standby switch to power on the instrument see Figure 1 5 for the switch location 0 0C ane ar M ko 000000009 0 Switch S Figure 1 5 On Standby switch location 7 Wait for the boot routine and low level self test to complete 8 Follow any instructions on the screen The internal setup software will automatically configure your instrument and install all required devices depending on the installed accessories CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 1 13 Installation Powering Off the Instrument The instrument has a built in soft power down function that safely powers down the instrument when you push the On Standby button You do not need to close the UI application or Windows 98 before using the On Standby button To completely remove power to the instrument first soft power down the instrument using the On Standby button and then set the power switch on the rear panel to off Create an Emergency Startup Disk 1 14 A Now that you have completed the basic installation process you should create an emergency startup di
67. 0 0005 3 52 Mag and Mag2 are Magnifying Timebases 05 3 53 Horizontal Position and the Horizontal Reference 3 53 Mouse and Touchscreen Operation sexe essex cteegadaawe des 3 53 To Display Waveforms in the Main Time Base View 3 55 To Display Waveforms in a Mag View l l 3 57 Customizing the Display opened mated icis uto rd Diac iP q de ded ee es 3 58 NVI NISC A EEPm 3 58 WaS a a aa n eee R E R 3 59 CATONE DD aae Ea kee EE ERR 3 59 Display SOUS opea eue d tore n dcr meu ee P EE PER E dde 3 59 Normal and Persistence Displays llle 3 60 IBtePDOLA TOR g cced ces csoeu ase ten kee oes eo EHE PERI Edd EE 3 60 Tosa Display SVEN 2445025056056 ce eee oats aui oy Pau de dd E 3 61 To Customize the Graticule and Waveforms 000000005 3 62 Measuring Waveforms 21e we i RORCER OERE RET ETE REA Ya E CRX 3 65 Taking Automatic Measurements 0 0c cece eee eens 3 66 MLO prere pae r r a ea a a E 3 66 What s Mea UO ou unen cowie ace caros Ra Cee ee RESPIRARE RASNE SE 3 66 bci ep E E EEEE EEN 3 66 Annotate Waveforms On Screen nunnu na 0 ccc eee eens 3 66 Use Databases as Sources ruat E cr E PCRHESTRRE cadawe ee 3 67 Take Eye Pattern and Optical Measurements 05 3 67 Characterize Measurements Independently 3 67 See Statistics on Measurement Results 0 0
68. 00 BODOO0DO 11 May 00 13 25 Pass 0 2 C C Recall Compensate Click to select compensate Upper Sampling Modules Serial Date Time 80C01 CR PQ2048 11 May 00 13 25 Pass 0 0 C fan Choose all as targets cri Storage ser Lower Sampling Modules Serial Date Time overriden by upper modules overriden by upper modules 80E04 B69 11 May 0013 25 Pass 0 0 C 80E04 B69 11 May 0013 25 Pass 0 0 C 80E03 B22 11 May 001325 Pass 0 0 C 80E03 B22 11 May 0013 25 Pass 0 0 C lt Click to start compensation Co 74 CD Cn 4 CO l2 Figure 1 6 Compensation dialog box b Wait until the Status for all items you wish to compensate changes from Warm Up to Pass Fail or Comp Req d c Under Select Action click the Compensate option button d From the top pulldown list choose All default selection to select the main instrument and all its modules as targets to compensate e Click the Execute button to begin the compensation f Follow the instructions to disconnect inputs and install terminations that will appear on screen be sure to follow static precautions see the user manual for your sampling module when following these instructions NOTE Failing to install the 50 ohm terminations on electrical inputs can yield erroneous compensation failures or results 2 Verify that the compensation routines pass a The compensation may take several minutes to comp
69. 000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Data Input and Output Overview To save a waveform Cont Control elements amp resources Add acomment 7 optional Save your waveform For more information For saves to files or to references you can enter a Comment Output 4 Test Seq A04 TP 101 useful comment about the each waveform you save Recorded 2 9 00 a Write each comment such that it explains the purpose of dica Lu zi the saved waveform when its waveform file is later E Ee accessed see right Tip If you save multiple waveforms the instrument Saves your comment with all the resulting files so make such a comment pertain to all the waveforms Click the Save button to save the waveform file or reference To cancel without saving click Cancel button Cancel Help For more help on saving waveforms press the Help button in the dialog box to access the contextual online help See page 3 145 to learn about using online help End of Procedure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 111 Data Input and Output To Recall Your Waveform Use the procedure that follows to recall a waveform to a reference You can only recall waveforms into references NOTE Reference waveforms do not recall because they are already instrument resident You can copy a reference waveform to another reference first display the reference to be copied and then use the Save Waveform procedure to save it to another refere
70. 1 Mask 1 0 Total 60 Waveforms 195 For more 9 For more help on using FrameScan acquisitions click information the Help button in the Horz Setup dialog box to display contextual help on screen See page 3 145 to learn about using online help End of Procedure 3 36 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Triggering Edge Triggering Why Use What s Special Keys to Using To properly acquire waveforms to sample a signal and assemble it into a waveform record you need to set up the instrument trigger conditions This section provides an overview of the instrument trigger features and their use Signal processing amp transformation system Output and User Interface storage and display Trigger Time base system system The instrument supports direct edge triggering which triggers as described in Keys to Using on page 3 37 You must provide an external trigger source except when using clock recovery triggering from an optical sampling module equipped with the clock recovery option or using the internal clock as when TDR testing Use triggering controls to control the acquisition window so that the instrument acquires the waveform data you want The trigger event when synchronized to the input signal defines the horizontal acquisition window By choosing the trigger event and adjusting the horizontal position delay between trigger event and the horizontal reference point you control the
71. 1 Rise 50 91ns Click the measurement you want in the measure ment tool bar Read the results in the measurements readout Tip To show the levels See page 3 66 on which your measurement is based turn on Annotations Right click on measurement in the readout and select Show Annotations from the menu as Shown at right Right click on any measurement readout to display its context menu Select Show Statistics to display measurement Statistics In the measurement readout 000 User Manual To take automatic measurements Cont Related control elements and resources Take Automatic 3 Tektronix ct 7 oov EE 50x N avd ed ee zw az pour C1 200 Op vvdiv RENE Eo Show Statistics Setup Measurement 3 73 Measuring Waveforms Overview To take automatic measurements Cont Related control elements and resources To measure a 8 From the application menu bar select Setup and then Setup Utilities Help Trig database select Measurement See right Vertical l Horizontal In the Meas Setup dialog box make sure the Acquire measurement one of Meas1 through Meas8 is Trigger selected Mask Inthe Source tab check the Use Wfm Database option Mienlan as shown below source Region HiLow RetLevel Main Cl 4 ON wm Database Clear nal Type Pulse Eve Tip If atthe time you first create a measurement the measurement source you select is display
72. 1 empi 7 File s File Path C My Documents UI Data MainC1 wim EH Comment Output 4 Test Seq A04 TP 101 a DUT PQual04 Save Recorded 2 3 00 By Alex T Evans ATE gl TN CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual TZ See Sampling Module User Manuals for Sampling module installation See Power On Instrument on page 1 12 See page 3 23 for acquisition setup See page 3 45 for trigger setup See page 3 51 for time base display File Edit View Setup Utilities Hel Save Setup Save Setup As Save Waveform tt Recall Setup Recall Waveform Export Waveform Print Ctrl P Print Setup Recent Ie Exit 3 109 Data Input and Output Overview Select a 4 destination Select your 5 waveform s to save Select directory 6 and name file 3 110 Navigate to the directory in which to store your waveform You can m Save toa reference Click to check Reference and then use the pulldown list to select any reference R1 R8 You can save to empty references or save over existing references Skip to step 8 to finish Save to a file Click to check file and continue with Step 5 that follows Select one or more waveform to save m Click a waveform in the tree view see right Note that only displayed timebases and their waveforms appear Extend your selection if desired by holding down the control key and clicking additional waveform
73. 3 00 3 56 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Displaying Waveforms Overview To control the Main view Cont Related control elements and resources Explore the 10 The next procedure describes how to set up and Mag time base control the Mag time bases controls See To Display Waveforms in a Mag View on page 3 57 End of Procedure To Display Waveforms Use the procedure that follows to become familiar with the display adjustments ina Mag View you can make when using the Mag 1 and Mag 2 time base views Overview To control a Mag view Related control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 Setup as from the last procedure See right See To Display Waveforms in the Main Timebase on page 3 55 Turn on a Mag 2 Push the Mag or Mag2 View button turns HORIZONTAL view amber to display a Mag view See right A numbered button lights when its waveform is on VIEW m lighted green view is on but not selected m lighted amber view is on and selected Tip Drag the divider bar between the two views to adjust the display height between them See the figure in step 3 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 57 Displaying Waveforms Overview To control a Mag view Cont Related control elements and resources Set horizontal 3 Use the Horizontal knobs see right to achieve a good ACQUISITION sms display display of the waveform in the Mag time base ce parameters l Time base s
74. 3 142 Waveform database view of a waveform 3 142 Waveform database data using the Intensity display ODUUH sae eee ese seen ENEE saws DX 3 144 Figure B 1 Levels used to determine measurements B 6 Figure B 2 Eye diagram and optical values B 7 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Ae General Safety Summary Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it To avoid potential hazards use this product only as specified Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures While using this product you may need to access other parts of the system Read the General Safety Summary in other system manuals for warnings and cautions related to operating the system To Avoid Fire or Use Proper Power Cord Use only the power cord specified for this product and Personal Injury certified for the country of use Connect and Disconnect Properly Do not connect or disconnect probes or test leads while they are connected to a voltage source Ground the Product This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord To avoid electric shock the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product ensure that the product is properly grounded Observe All Terminal Ratings To avoid fire or shock hazard observe all ratings and
75. 5 x S fe pend Stop 1 Tiig Estemal Direct sl o ov aK Ex k 9 Amplitude nn nna c ruc nn wr 300 7 7 nn s re e vr lt A h al 2 C1 100mV div M1 7nV div 2 274 2 2844 2 918mV 530 5ns 1 059us 528ns 1 At 1 894MHz 13 Read the results in cursor readout In the figure shown above waveform cursors are used to measure the V of the integral math waveform which could be used to compute its area f vdt End of Procedure For more information on taking automatic and cursor measurements of wave forms see Measuring Waveforms on page 3 65 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 99 Creating Math Waveforms 3 100 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual BEEN ee Data Input and Output This section describes the input and output capabilities of your instrument Specifically it covers M Saving and Recalling Setups on page 3 101 M Saving and Recalling Waveforms on page 3 108 m Exporting Waveforms on page 3 116 M Printing Waveforms on page 3 120 Remote Communication on page 3 121 Signal processing amp transformation system Acquisition system Time base system Output and User Interface storage and display saving and Recalling Setups Why Use What s Special This instrument can save a number of different instrument setups for later recall limited only by the space you have to store the setups Save and recall different setups to switch from setup
76. 55 4 SITIO O OFFSET RESOLUTION READY Press to display and select a time base view not a selected or to select among displayed views gt B press selected timebase again to toggle it off SEH except Main which is always on Page 3 5 7 4 SCALE 4 SCALE KLE Turn knobs to vertically scale position and s gt offset selected waveform Page 3 8 le UU Turn knobs to Horizontally scale position and set record length of selected waveform Page 3 9 Use controls to set trigger level and lights to monitor trigger state Page 3 45 2 8 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual n Display Map Single Graticule View Drag cursors to measure waveforms on screen File Edit View Setup Utilities Help Triggered Wavefom 0 Tektronix laj xl alz ajame Run Stap Aca Mode average T Trial External Direct 7 rov E 50 N Drag the Horizontal Reference to move Amplitude gt mj cn nx an wr Nen f yv n e EA zz Waveform i l T 100 0m Vidi the point around which horizontal scaling om UE cte Ci juo expands and contracts the waveforms MN Drag the Waveform Icon vertically xn mr cr um i Off I S38us to position waveform Copy hep LE eee Send To Back 4 040s Wat 2475KHz Right click on a waveform or its v Show tad ayaa ese es Glanisraue icon for handy access to often used setup controls a
77. 6 B 3 Extinction Ratio DB B 3 Eye Height B 3 Eye Width B 3 Fall Time B 5 Frequency B 5 Gain B 1 High B 1 Jitter Pk Pk B 3 Jitter RMS B 3 Low B 2 Maximum B 2 Mean B 2 Mid B 1 Minimum B 2 Negative Crossing B 5 Negative Duty Cycle B 5 Negative Width B 5 Noise Pk Pk B 4 Noise RMS B 4 Peak to Peak B 2 Period B 5 Phase B 5 Positive Crossing B 5 Positive Duty Cycle B 5 Positive Width B 5 Quality Factor B 4 Rise Time B 5 Index 1 Index RMS B 2 S N Ratio B 4 Automatic measurements 3 66 amplitude category B 1 annotations 3 66 area category B 2 behavior with databases 3 68 categories for selection 3 68 database as source requirement exclusion 3 67 databases as sources 3 67 dual waveform 3 68 eye pattern optical category B 3 eye pattern and optical 3 67 High and Low levels defined B 6 high low tracking 3 68 methods for 3 69 how to localize gates 3 75 how to take 3 72 independent characterization of 3 67 levels used in taking B 6 B 7 list of supported B 1 number available 3 68 reference level methods 3 70 reference levels defined B 6 reference levels defined eye pattern optical B 7 signal type 3 68 sources available 3 68 statistics on 3 67 usage limitations 3 67 what s measured 3 66 why use 3 66 Automatic trigger mode Glossary 1 Autoset 3
78. 6 selected waveform 3 7 Controls bar 2 6 Coupling Glossary 3 Crossing measurement B 3 CS AS8000 description 1 1 Cursor measurements 3 77 3 79 Cursor Measurements how to set sources for 3 82 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Index Cursor measurements how to take 3 81 sources 3 78 what s measured 3 77 why use 3 77 Cursors 3 77 Glossary 3 constrained by the display 3 78 default measurement source 3 78 horizontal bars Glossary 5 measure horizontally from the trigger point 3 79 types 3 78 units and readout names 3 80 use with independent sources 3 79 vertical bars Glossary 9 waveform Glossary 9 what time cursors measure illustration 3 80 Cycle Area measurement B 2 Cycle Mean measurement B 1 Cycle RMS measurement B 1 D Dark Level compensation how to perform 3 87 Data controlling input and output 3 101 Data Input and Output 3 101 Database waveform Glossary 10 Databases Waveform 3 139 Delay measurement B 5 Delay time Glossary 3 horizontal Glossary 5 Description key features 1 1 product 1 1 Deskew Glossary 2 how to 3 86 Diagnostics procedure 1 20 system 1 17 Digitizing Glossary 3 process defined 3 26 3 28 Display customizable attributes of 3 59 defined 3 48 elements of 3 48 flexible control 3 49 graticule defined 3 48 horizontal reference defined 3 48 horizontal scale readout de
79. 8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual B 5 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported Levels Used in Taking Amplitude Timing and Area Measurements B 6 Refer to Figure B 1 and the descriptions that follow to interpret the definitions of waveforms in categories Amplitude Timing and Area High HighR ef MidR ef LowRef Low Figure B 1 Levels used to determine measurements High the value used as the 100 level in amplitude measurements such as Peak and Overshoot High is also used to help derive the HighRef MidRef MidRef2 and LowRef values Low the value used as the 0 level in amplitude measurements such as Peak and Overshoot Low is also used to help derive the HighRef MidRef MidRef2 and LowRef values Depending on the measurement you may be able to select how the High and Low values are determined see High Low Tracking on page 3 68 for details HighRef the waveform high reference level used in such measurements as fall time and rise time Typically set to 90 You can choose how this level is set see Reference Levels Method on page 3 70 MidRef the waveform middle reference level used in such measurements as Period and Duty Cycle Typically set to 50 You can choose how this level is set see Reference Levels Method on page 3 70 LowRef the waveform low reference level Used in fall and rise time calculations Typically set to 10 You can choose how this level is
80. 9191908 3 09 9 020 3 39 dS 49 29 0 NEQUEO dE Product Description MOEI 224 P m IX Hcc PME aoe eee eee eae enemies a PROCUCE SOM crc rm Pirate Upp rade nin ot ene ee ee hee tpe RR eae ee boue io eeu d d Sampling Modules Supported uius cate sock er RITEPRECRE does soe ke one as Check the Package Contents eere Instal t0ll 5452959999 9 99 9993421299999 015253 291999213 299275 Check the Environmental Requirements 23x vadam 2399 caddies ob ou Install the Sampling MOGOU OS 4 704 050x4 0 3 pa cedes de eeeinte Janes 93 38 Connect the Penphcidls aod ary tcp eame der eame eda 3 ot Power On the Past arbe 65 2222 29 62a ea ecd 9 dco macer Gages 93 15 Powering Of the Pusttutnetit 4 04 1nexe acr irre ecd 3e ac mera rios Jakes obec Create an Emergency Staltup DISK 222 arro hay erm Jones ode Back ONE gi operer a E a SOA ea IR ETET I E E ENE E hs Aedes ed a DED ON ce ce Eea E A E i A a USES PE SOV are Release NOES sev ecs cease iapa ronpi a i Operating System Reinstallation auae y EE RR EEREERERE RE ERR Ha Windows 98 Reinstall Only 24 20652 4544 40 4 0622680880 e 3e Sy SIEHE Dia NOSIS aee coe eek eke eee emawee ale Gates cus h comme Inspection saecu o Va A ICA SA ES eos se URS ARX ACRES ess Assemble Equipment soo 2 dicis UE ease eee semen ene PPS USE AES ES Perforate Ia BOSE es seeded tesa oreo Wd esu Pus ed Eq e PSeNUS E Bes EE Perform the Compensatlon s acce tosu
81. A8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual
82. ALE NV O Figure 1 9 Channel button location 4 Verify that the channel is operational Confirm that the following statements are true CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Incoming Inspection B The vertical scale readout for the channel under test shows a baseline trace at about center screen see Figure 1 10 on page 1 27 and a setting as follows 80C01 80C02 and 80C04 1 mW 80C03 100 uW 80C05 3 mW 80C06 6 mW M The Vertical POSITION front panel knob for the channel you are testing moves the signal up and down the screen when rotated Return the baseline trace to center screen before before continuing Turning the Vertical OFFSET front panel knob counterclockwise offsets the baseline towards the bottom of the screen turning the knob clockwise offsets the baseline towards the top of the screen and returning the knob to 0 000 offset returns the baseline to center screen File Edi View Setup Utilities Help Triggered aveforms 0 Tektronix 5 X f mr Run Stap ca Mode 5 ample Tig intemal Clock s le oY E su h2 ae a DENEN NNENENNMES z za 8 Waveform C1 1 090 div Baseline Vertical offset C 7 ooomWw 500 Ops div Control bar jc D00r E sah 2 000m zu main au A j fon Dpsdi E E fo Sons Ej 12 27 PM 3 22 00 Vertical offset setting Figure 1 10 Optical channel verification CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 1 27 Incoming Inspection S Verify
83. BIS tana a at eee pee poesie md ttp eds S E sey s B 2 Eye Pattern and Optical Measurements a ua aces ee m 98 909 3119 309 438 sob tu B 3 Tei Measure Monl ero oak oe eae ee eh one ido edP ubt Ebo ds B 5 Levels Used in Taking Amplitude Timing and Area Measurements B 6 Levels Used im Taking Eye Measurements 42a ade i903 309 e 33 tu B 7 Appendix C Insert Sampling Module User Manuals Here C 1 Glossary Index CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual vii Table of Contents List of Tables viii Table 1 1 Additional accessory connection information 1 12 Table 1 2 Line S68 aduer aud tenes Vad diode ado arab Oed Rs 1 12 Table 1 3 Standard accessories eee 1 35 Table 1 4 Optional accessories eere 1 36 Table 3 1 Application based triggering 3 40 Table 3 2 Defining and displaying waveforms 3 50 Table 3 3 Operations performed based on the selected waveform 3 51 Table 3 4 Equivalent mouse and touchscreen operations 3 54 Table 3 5 Customizable display attributes 3 59 Table 3 6 Cursor functions types eere 3 77 Table 3 7 Cursor WB 2iuc ncccveseene ace ses concave 2E 922 3 80 Table 3 8 Math expressions and the math waveforms produced 3 91 Table 5 9 Standard masks 22 9 922299902 92332202 c2 3 124 Table 3 10 Histogram statistics eee 3 138 Tabl
84. For more help on exporting waveforms press the Help button in the dialog box to access contextual online help End of Procedure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual See page 3 145 to learn about accessing online help 3 119 Data Input and Output Printing Waveforms 3 120 You can print the display screen including any waveforms displayed Before doing so you must install and set up your printer Consult the instructions that come with your printer Also for printer setup instructions you can display Windows help and access its section on printers see page 3 151 for information on accessing Window help To print a waveform from the application menu bar select the File menu and then select Print The instrument displays the standard MS Windows 98 Print dialog box shown in Figure 3 26 Access the windows help system for more information Prnt ki Ix T ektranis Phaser 340 Properties Status Ready Type Tektronis Phaser 340 Wher whekadm S ps391 car Comment Tek Phaser 340 B39 L1 Grid E10 Print to file Copies Number of copies li Print range E AJ Rages fram tor I sel s 7 eae C Selection Cancel Figure 3 26 Print dialog box NOTE If the display screen printouts have missing information such as blacked out readouts your instrument may need to be set to a higher color setting To do so follow the steps below 1 Click the minimize button in the upper
85. Jracdceq ee e 3 Pe mE ER SEXO EET aos Ed Perform the Functional Tests oueheace 9d soeed sees Re EEUU ERES E n RE Perform the Hardware and Operating System Tests llslsu Accessories and Options ccc cece cece c ccc c cece escsecees ACCO O 4s cache ec Oat EDS SIRE SD ERS EIER SUE UE E E EE ran eee viis Detanucowehe Boeheee se mceeanystenusne sno ne ea E SU MT TT TT IBID E RCKTTTITT TIL a E E E E RE S Operational Maps Documentation Map 4 9 r9 y Rr rrr System Overview Maps ceeeeeeeeeeeeeh nnn Lunconmi Model MO eeu acer ed pce ens one ace PRETI Seu et CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual xi xiii xiii xiii X1V XV m a e e m l MM WW WD us 1 2 3 2 3 Table of Contents Process Overview Map us ete dese utem uo Obed EPIPESTJG ERE d 2 5 User Interface Map Complete Control and Display 2 6 Front Panel Map Quick Access to Most Often Used Features 2 7 Display Map Single Graticule View e 2 8 Display Map Multiple Views cere nnn 2 9 Front Panel VO Map saci uer wp R RECO C CY e rra hey OR yas 2 10 Rear Panel WO Map 66 suus cur UR 3 RACE ee nes ERR RR a s 2 11 Reference Overview ceeeeeeeeeeoeosoocsscoccececececcecceccecececccece 3 1 T 2 Acquiring Waveforms cc cece cece ccc cece cece hh nn Signal Connection and Scalig 2uuuao dx deer 9h REI RE PARES ues MU 225 tetevne tes e
86. M1 M8 depending on the Vertical Source button you push CH REF or MATH Operations on Selected Waveforms In general the method of adjusting vertically scaling offsetting position and so on is from the front panel select the waveform using the Vertical source and waveform selection buttons and then adjust it using the Vertical Scale Offset and Position knobs Table 3 3 on page 3 51 summarizes operations you can perform for the three waveform types 3 50 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Displaying Waveforms Table 3 3 Operations performed based on the selected waveform Control function Vertical Scale Vertical Position Vertical Offset Horizontal Scale Horizontal Position Horizontal Record Length Automatic Source Selection for Automatic Measurements Automatic Target Selection for Cursors Quick Horizontal Scale Adjust Zoom Waveform supports Operating notes C Ref Math h Yes If more than one time base is displayed these controls adjust the selected channel waveform in all time bases Vertical offset is unavailable for channel waveforms displayed with rho Yes No NO orohm unis uN UE All channel waveforms are adjusted globally in the selected time base Math waveforms are not adjusted because their horizontal parameters Lg M M are derived from their sources Reference waveforms are not adjusted res fo because they have fixed horizontal parameters determined at the time the waveform was
87. MA m Slip on SMA connector m 2X Attenuator SMA Male to F emale m 5X Attenuator Male to F emale m Power Divider m BNC Female 75 Ohm to 50 Ohm Type N Minimum Loss Attenuator m P6209 4 GHz Active FET Probe m P6150 9 GHz Passive Probe m Replacement hard disk drive m CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Service Manual 1 36 Part Number DL 11 SIU 800 012 1568 00 012 1569 00 015 0552 00 015 0553 00 015 1001 00 015 1002 00 015 1014 00 131 0112 00 P6209 P6150 119 6241 00 071 0438 XX CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Accessories and Options Options The following options can be ordered for the instrument CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Option 1K Cart Option IR Rack Mount Kit includes hardware and instructions for converting to rackmount configuration International Power Cords Options Option A1 Universal Euro 220V 50 Hz Option A2 UK 240V 50 Hz Option A3 Australian 240V 50 Hz Option A5 Switzerland 220V 50 Hz Option AC China 220V 50 Hz Option A99 No power cord shipped Service offerings Option C3 Three years of calibration services Option D3 Test Data for calibration services in Opt C3 Option R3 Repair warranty extended to cover three years Option D1 Calibration data report 1 37 Accessories and Options 1 38 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual ee ee Operational Maps This chapter acquaints you with how the instrument functions and operates It consists o
88. Map Removable hard disk drive to provide individual environment for each user or to secure data press to release CDROM drive accessible from Windows 98 press to open USB connector for mouse r keyboard and mouse PS 2 connectors for mouse and keyboard Upper VGA port to connect a second 6 2223 eoe monitor for side by side display Lower VGA port to connect a monitor for oscilloscope display Parallel port Centronics to e e connect printer or other device 000000000000 GPIB portto connect to controller OOOOO0 RJ 45 connector to connect to network COM1 serial port Card Bus slots for two PCMCIA type 1 cards two type 2 cards or one type 3 card iiri 2 12 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual ee aAA Overview This chapter describes how the many features of the instrument operate Please note the following points on using this chapter M Each section in this chapter provides background information needed to operate the instrument effectively as well as the higher level procedures for accessing and using the features These procedures emphasize using the front panel when possible B Lower l
89. RI P EREREESEAS sean esses esa dE dH d 3 95 Wiat Ex dod 52522 d PEU PEERS RW RDAT EE EE ond eiae ds 3 95 Ko A i EE ETTE TEPE EEES PEET ENE ees 3 96 Source Considerations 226064508658 oes ei Sei Adnin aen 3 96 Display Consid rati nS s s 292 22 82 2 e REESE ES 239 92i SE ERES Rn 3 96 To Use Math Waveforms 2443600652546 o6665 EX IU US Rea eee A wen 3 97 Data Input and Output 55e 4c ach a9 9 CR HEROS AUR SOR ra 3 101 Savine and Recalling Se DS 25a 2d 5 9 pace 9H PUER SHEER PSASSE eed ER 3 101 Wy Use A A rr 3 101 WHEL S SPCCldl c a 3 101 COMMEUNNG 64 nec5454000 odn bossa besten suast ede ses Gs 3 102 Virtual Keyboarding u ad uod 04004 neers editur Hume eura a Pn 3 102 Whats Excluded lt ccsuactasos 05 a ROCA ERES POR d EUER A pA tees 3 102 Kosto USNE FM 3 102 All Settings are Retained usua ame dcos Road osquna award a eae 3 102 Retaining Current Settings 1v aura dins coord knee word a eas 3 102 Avoiding Setup Waveform Mismatches 00 eee 3 102 Avoiding Setup and Sampling Module Mismatches 3 103 TOSave VOUr ELI s nuce sch d 15s ard ees edad dax d wg hus dad rss 3 103 Bo bio dec rr 3 106 Saving and Recalling Waveforms 12 52 x9 psec quor I gor EE A RE RE 3 108 Canat o 3 108 brad Vu ETT 3 108 CCORTIBIETIDITIS oos eesresqutromuresqeu veru W Ue s uad dua ure 3 108 Virtual Keyboarding cuo a ovt a
90. Terms on the Product These terms may appear on the product DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the marking WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the marking CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product Symbols on the Product The following symbols may appear on the product A A CAUTION WARNING Protective Ground Refer to Manual High Voltage Earth Terminal This product may be rackmounted by using the appropriate Tektronix rackmount kit and following its instructions If rackmounting you must observe the following warnings WARNING To prevent the rackmounted instrument from tipping forward onto the operator install the instrument so that the operator will be able to access all of its rear devices without pushing down on the instrument Verify that the rack does not become unstable with the instrument fully extended Do not leave the instrument extended when finished accessing the rear panel CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Preface This is the user manual for the instrument It covers the following information About This Manual Describes the capabilities of the instrument how to install it and reinstall its software Explains how to operate the instrument how to control acquisition of processing of and input output of information Lists the specifications and accessories of the instrument This manual is composed of the
91. User Interface Specialization Digital Signal Acquisition amp Transformation amp Storage amp Waveform Display Input Modules tee Chan 1 8 Acquisition SP amp T r system systems CHL gt Page 3 47 Page 3 5 Page 3 19 Pages Page 3 13 3 65 Ref 1 8 3 89 CENE 3 123 Clock recovery options only Trigger Timebase System system Page 3 37 External trigger inputs The model comprises five high level subsystems or processes embodying a variety of hardware and software functions Modular Sampling Specialization System Allows you to choose modules to begin tailoring your waveform acquisition based on the types of signals you want to acquire electrical or optical with clock recovery or without with bandwidth filter or not Provides cost effective solution for users needing very high bandwidth with superb time resolution on repetitive waveforms Sampling modules determine the size of the vertical acquisition window for each channel M Digital Signal Acquisition System Acquires a waveform record from each signal you apply to each channel using the following subsystems 2 4 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Operating Basics Acquisition System Sets vertical offset for the vertical acquisition window for each channel Performs the actual A D conversion and storing of digitized samples Also performs post A D sample based corrections to compensate
92. User Manual Tektronix CSA8000 Communications Signal Analyzer TDS8000 Digital Sampling Oscilloscope 071 0433 02 This document applies to firmware version 1 00 and above www tektronix com Copyright Tektronix Inc All rights reserved Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its suppliers and are protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 11 of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 or subparagraphs c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 as applicable Tektronix products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material Specifications and price change privileges reserved Tektronix Inc P O Box 500 Beaverton OR 97077 TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc WARRANTY Tektronix warrants that the products that it manufactures and sells will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one 1 year from the date of shipment If this product proves defective during its warranty period Tektronix at its option will either repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor or provide a replacement in exchange for the def
93. Windows contain two or three keys specific to that operating system These are usually located on either side of the space bar QAPlus WIN does not trap these keys when performing the keyboard test Do not press them CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Incoming Inspection Checking the Cooling Fan DismissPower on the instrument and visually inspect the left side panel of the Operation instrument to verify that all six cooling fans are rotating Equipment None required Prerequisites The instrument must be powered on and running Checking the Hardware To perform a minimal check of the hardware and Windows 98 operating system and Operating System of this instrument perform this procedure to run QAPlus Win diagnostics from Optional the Windows 98 Start menu Equipment None required Prerequisites A mouse and keyboard must be ocnnected to the instrument and it must be powered on 1 Push the RUN STOP front panel button to stop acquisition 2 Minimize the application to the Windows Task bar by clicking the minimize button in the upper right corner of the application on screen 3 Click Start then select Programs and then Sykes Diagnostics in the Start Menu Finally click QA Win32 4 Click Tools on the menu bar then click Customize Test 5 Click Default and exit this dialog by clicking OK 6 Select and execute the following tests by clicking on the highlighted test buttons in Figure below one at a time and click
94. a waveform record suitable for acquiring and analyzing Pseudo Random Bit Streams PRBS s which are contained within a repeating data frame See FrameScan Acquisitions on page 3 29 for more information on using FrameScan acquisitions Envelope acquisition mode can not be used with FrameScan acquisitions you must use Sample or Average modes The key points that follow describe operating considerations for setting up the acquisition system so the waveforms acquired best fit your requirements Acquisition Modes Consider the mode you want to use to acquire data Sample the instrument does no post processing of acquired samples CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Acquiring Waveforms m Average the instrument processes the number of waveforms you specify into the acquired waveform creating a running exponential average of the input signal M Envelope the instrument retains the running minimum Min and maximum Max values in adjacent sample intervals continuously as subsequent waveforms are acquired creating an envelope of all waveforms acquired for that channel Acquiring and displaying a noisy square wave signal illustrates the difference between the three modes Note how Average reduces the noise while Envelope captures its extremes Sample Average Envelope Acquisition Control Also consider how you want to control acquisition you have two main options either settable from the Acquisition Setup
95. age limitations 3 124 why use 3 123 Masks Fiberchannel standards supported 3 124 Gigabit Ethernet 3 124 SONET SDH standards supported 3 124 Math waveform defining overview 3 89 how to define 3 93 how to use 3 97 operations on 3 95 display considerations 3 96 source considerations 3 96 take automatic measurements on 3 98 take cursor measurements on 3 99 Math Waveforms how to create 3 91 sources for 3 9 1 Math waveforms Glossary 6 expression syntax for 3 92 overview 3 89 source dependencies of 3 92 time base dependencies of 3 92 usage limitations 3 90 3 95 why use 3 90 Maximum measurement B 2 Mean measurement B 2 Measurement T Overshoot B 2 Overshoot B 2 AC RMS B 1 Index 5 Index Amplitude B 1 Area B 2 Average Optical Power B 3 Burst Width B 5 Crossing 96 B 3 Cycle Area B 2 Cycle Mean B 1 Cycle RMS B 1 Delay B 5 Duty Cycle Distortion B 3 Extinction Ratio B 3 Extinction Ratio B 3 Extinction Ratio DB B 3 Eye Height B 3 Eye Width B 3 Fall Time B 5 Frequency B 5 Gain B 1 Gated Glossary 4 High B 1 Glossary 5 Jitter Pk Pk B 3 Jitter RMS B 3 Low B 2 Glossary 6 Maximum B 2 Mean B 2 Mid B 1 Minimum B 2 Negative Crossing B 5 Negative Duty Cycle B 5 Negative Width B 5 Noise Pk Pk B 4 Noise RMS B 4 Peak to Peak B 2 Period B 5 Phase B
96. ains every word fram your help file s Ta create this list now click Next Maximize search capabilities Customize search capabilities Back Cancel Print Cancel 13 Choose the method for word list generation and select next or finish Once the word list generation finishes future accesses of the find tab will immediately access a pane for searching with full text search without requiring the word to be regenerated Control elements amp resources amp Help Triggered avetorme 0 Setup Guide Programmer Guide About TDS L54 8000 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Accessing Online Help Overview To use the online help Cont Control elements amp resources To Access Op 14 Click the minimize button to reduce the User Interface Click to Minimize to the toolbar erating System Application to an icon on the operating system Help toolbar See upper right Tektronix 5 x Click the Start button to pop up the Start menu and 1 Qu V aH Ko then select Help from the menu See lower right The online help for the Windows operating system IE NAES aka S displays ipw When your done with the online help you can dismiss C3 S0 00r Vidi it To restore the user interface application to the screen click its icon in the tool bar Programs Tip To switch between online help and the application you can hold down the ALT key while you press Tab repeatedly to alternate between bringi
97. al scaling and positioning setting resolution record length and so on is from the front panel select the time base using the Horizontal time base selection buttons CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 51 Displaying Waveforms 3 52 and then adjust it using the Horizontal Scale Resolution and Position knobs Only channel waveforms can have their horizontal parameters set directly Table 3 3 shows how horizontal operations relate to the waveform types the key points to remember follow As Table 3 3 shows horizontal operations affect all channel waveforms but in the selected view only For example you can select each time base in turn and set one horizontal scale for all channel waveforms in the Main view another horizontal scale for those in the Magl view and a third for those in the Mag2 view The instrument displays a reference waveform with horizontal settings in effect at the time it was saved You cannot adjust these settings the instrument disables the horizontal controls when you select a reference waveform See Saving and Recalling Waveforms on page 3 108 for more information on reference waveforms The instrument displays a math waveform with the horizontal settings derived from its math expression You cannot change these directly the instrument disables the horizontal controls when you select a math wave form See Creating Math Waveforms on page 3 89 for more information on math waveforms All waveforms i
98. al xi ajz f nc stop 1 Tiig E stemal Direct sl E mv BE 50 h2 9 C1 10mV div Measurement 1C1 Rise 50 91ns Click a measurement button The instrument automatically takes the measurement on the waveform you selected in step 5 Read the results in the measurements readout Tip For more control of your measurement go to the Setup menu in the application menu bar and select Measurements Click the Help button in the Measurements Setup dialog box that displays for more information 3 98 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Creating Math Waveforms Overview To use math waveforms Cont Related control elements amp resources Take cursor Press the Vertical MATH button and use the ree measurements numbered front panel button to choose a math waveform from M1 M8 The button will light amber when you have chosen the waveform See figure at upper right Press the CURSORS button see figure at lower right P ress m Once to display vertical bar cursors shown below T DEFAULT FINE CURSORS SELECT ACQUISITION m A second time to display horizontal bar cursors m A third time to display waveform based cursors Press the SELECT button to toggle selection between the two cursors 12 Turn the knob to position each cursor on the math waveform to measure the feature that interests you File Edit View Setup Utilities Help Triggered D Histogram Waveforms
99. alculation is made on the data being sent and the results are sent along with it The receiving station then performs the same calculation and compares its results with those sent Each data signal conforms to specific rules of construction so that departures from this construction in the received signals can be detected Any data detected as being in error is either deleted from the data delivered to the destination with or without an indication that such deletion has taken place or delivered to the destination together with an indication that it is in error Error rate The ratio of the number of data units 1n error to the total number of data units Edge trigger Triggering occurs when the instrument detects the source passing through a specified voltage level in a specified direction the trigger slope This instrument supports only edge triggering All trigger sources must be external except when using clock recovery available as an option with optical sampling modules or the internal clock Envelope acquisition mode A mode in which the instrument acquires and displays a waveform that shows the variation extremes of several acquisitions Equivalent time sampling ET A sampling mode in which the instrument acquires signals over many repetitions of the event This instrument uses a type of equivalent time sampling called sequential equivalent time sampling See Sequential equivalent time sampling Gated measurements A feature that l
100. alent with touchscreen 3 53 N Negative Crossing measurement B 5 Negative Duty Cycle measurement B 5 Negative Overshoot measurement B 2 Negative Width measurement B 5 Noise Pk Pk measurement B 4 Noise RMS measurement B 4 Normal display mode 3 60 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Index trigger mode 3 39 O Offset vertical 3 13 On Standby button 1 12 1 14 Online documentation 2 1 Online Help 2 1 2 2 accessing 3 145 how to use 3 146 types available 3 145 Online help displaying control descriptions 3 146 displaying overviews 3 147 for Windows 98 3 151 full text search 3 150 keys to using 3 145 set up procedures 3 149 using the finder 3 148 why use 3 145 Operating system reinstall 1 16 Operation limitations automatic measurements 3 67 math waveforms 3 90 3 95 Operational limitations Histograms 3 135 Mask testing 3 124 preview mode 3 49 save and recall of setups 3 102 save and recall of waveforms 3 108 vertical offset 3 5 waveform databases 3 139 Optical modules incoming inspection 1 26 installation 1 8 Optical sampling modules specifications where to find A 1 Optional accessories list 1 36 Options list 1 35 Overshoot measurement B 2 P Package shipping contents of 1 5 Peak to Peak measurement B 2 Period measurement B 5 Peripherals connection of 1 11 Persistence infinite 3 60 variable 3
101. and down on the waveform With input signals that are smaller than the window it appears the waveform moves in the window Actually a larger signal shows what really happens the offset moves the middle of the vertical acquisition window up and down on input signal Figure 3 3 shows how offset moves the acquisition window to control the portion of the waveform amplitude the window captured M Applying a negative offset moves the vertical range down relative to the DC level of the input signal moving the waveform up on the display Likewise applying a positive offset moves the vertical range up moving the waveform down on the display See Figure 3 3 NOTE On screen the channel icon in the waveform bar points to the offset value around which the vertical acquisition window is centered The offset value pointed to is relative to the ground reference icon Both icons are shown in Figure 3 3 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 15 Acquiring Waveforms 3 16 Vertical window 1 V peak to peak fixed by sampling module used Acquisition window shifts positive to capture overshoot Offset 0 0 V At waveform ground reference Offset 300 mV Waveform bottom level negative to capture preshoot Acquisition window shifts Figure 3 3 Varying offset positions verti
102. annels Number of channels depends on sampling modules installed Samping module ue Samping modue k Figure 3 7 Channel configuration Acquisition is the process of sampling an analog input signal of an input channel converting it into digital data and assembling it into a waveform record which is then stored in acquisition memory Sampling then is the process that provides one sample per trigger event and when taken from repeated trigger events also provides the digitized signal data from which the instrument assembles the waveform record see Figure 3 9 on page 3 28 The signal parts within the vertical range of the sampler are digitized See Figure 3 8 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Acquiring Waveforms P E P 0 V OV OV 0V X od P 0 5 V 0 5 V Input signal Sampled points Digital values Figure 3 8 Digital acquisition sampling and digitizing Sampling Modes The instrument acquisition system can process the data as it is acquired averaging or enveloping the waveform data to produce enhanced waveform records Once the waveform record exists enhanced or not you can use the post processing capabilities of the instrument to further process that record perform measurements waveform math mask tests and so on Refer to Keys to Using on page 3 20 for description of all three acquisition modes Waveform Record While sampling the input signal provides the data that makes up the waveform record for an
103. ar 3 115 Related Manuals xiii Release notes software 1 15 Remote communication 3 121 Index 8 Reset How to execute 3 12 of instrument 3 12 Rise Time measurement B 5 RMS measurement B 2 S S N Ratio measurement B 4 Sample acquisition mode Glossary 8 Sample interval Glossary 8 defined 3 27 Sampling Glossary 8 modes 3 27 3 29 process defined 3 26 3 28 process illustrated 3 27 3 28 sequential equivalent time Glossary 8 Sampling modules caution avoid damage 3 6 installation 1 8 installation compartments 1 10 external attenuators with 3 6 preventing overvoltage 3 6 keys to using 3 5 selection 3 5 signal connection 3 5 specifications where to find A 1 static concerns 1 8 supported 1 3 where to insert user manuals C 1 Save and recall of setups adding a comment 3 105 usage limitations 3 102 Save and recall of waveforms adding a comment 3 111 usage limitations 3 108 Save Mode if Windows starts in 1 17 Saved waveform saved Glossary 8 Saving a setup 3 101 Saving a waveform 3 108 Saving and recalling setups including comments 3 102 virtual keyboard with 3 102 why use 3 101 Saving and recalling waveforms including comments 3 108 virtual keyboard with 3 108 why use 3 108 Scale considerations for setting 3 6 SELECT button Glossary 8 Selected cursor Glossary 1 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Index Sele
104. are CD 063 3492 X X The product software or UI application complements the hardware controls of the front panel allowing complete set up of all instrument features The Product Software CD includes software allowing you to reinstall the product software without having to rebuild the entire operating system 1 15 Installation Software Release Notes Read the software release notes README TXT ASCII file if present on the Product Software CD before performing any installation procedures This file contains additional installation and operation information that supercedes other product documentation To view the README TXT file open the Notepad Windows accessory and open the file on the CD After installation you can also read the copy from a directory on the product C Programs Files TDSCSA8000 System A printed version of the Software Release Notes is shipped with the product The printed version included with your instrument supercedes the online version Operating System Use the following procedure if reinstalling Windows 98 becomes necessary Reinstallation NOTE Only do the reinstall if Windows 98 is missing or corrupted There are two possibilities for reinstall The instrument can access the hard drive if so reinstall Windows using the emergency startup disk and the procedure Windows 98 Reinstall Only on page 1 16 The instrument cannot access the hard drive or you do not have an emergen cy startup disk availa
105. arge Sampling Mod ule Interface Characteristics Tekprobe Sampling Level 3 Hot switching is not permitted on this interface Tekprobe Sampling Level 3 Hot switching is not permitted on this interface 1 Totalactively acquired channels lt 8 Table A 2 System Timebase Description Sampling rate Record length Horizontal scale range Horizontal position range Horizontal resolution Horizontal position setting resolution Horizontal modes Time internal ac curacy short term optimized mode Characteristics DC 200 kHz maximum dictated by trigger rate and actual holdoff setting If trigger rate is less than the maximum or the requested holdoff exceeds the minimum the trigger rate and or holdoff will dictate the sampling rate 20 50 100 250 500 1 000 2 000 or 4 000 samples 1 ps div to 5 ms div in 1 2 5 steps or 1 ps increments Maximum record lengths apply at certain ranges per table below Maximum record length 1000 2000 4000 Scale set to an integer multiple of 1 ps div 2 ps div 4 ps div 50 ms maximum 10 fs minimum 1 ps minimum Two modes Short Term Optimized and Locked to 10 MHz Reference The 10 MHz reference may be internal or external Strobe placement accuracy for a given horizontal interval and position on same strobe line per table below Contribution from 80E 04 sampling module is included in specification Range Time Interval Accuracy 20 ps div
106. as fall time and rise time Typically set to 90 See Levels Used in Amplitude Timing and Area Measurements on page B 6 for more details Holdoff trigger A specified amount of time after a trigger signal that elapses before the trigger circuit will accept another trigger signal Trigger holdoff helps ensure a stable display Horizontal Acquisition Window A common time window or range that is applied to all channels in parallel to determine the segment of an incoming signal that becomes the waveform record Trigger and horizontal controls determine the duration of this window and its placement in the incoming signal Horizontal bar cursors The two horizontal bars that you position to measure the amplitude parameters of a waveform The instrument displays the value of both cursors with respect to ground and the amplitude value between the bars Horizontal delay time The time between the trigger event and the acquisition of data The time is set indirectly by the Horizontal reference setting and the horizontal position settings See Horizontal Position and the Horizontal Reference on page 3 53 Horizontal reference point The point about which waveforms are expanded or contracted horizontally when horizontal scale adjustments are made The horizontal reference point remains anchored as the rest of the waveform grows or shrinks around it Interpolation The way the instrument calculates additional values to display when the acquired recor
107. ass 40 08 Factory 4 s0E04 ABO 11 May 00 13 25 Pass 0 0 C 5 a EQ3 B22 11 May 00 13 25 Pass 0 0 C B B EQ3 B22 11 May 00 13 25 Pass 0 0 C a 5 3 84 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Measuring Waveforms Overview To perform a compensation Cont Related control elements and resources Select the 3 Wait until the Status for all items you want to Select Action scope of the compensate changes from Warm Up to Comp Req d or compensation Pass C Save In the Select Action fields select Compensate Recall From the top pulldown list selectthe target to p to n Compensate compensate Choose from VID eade All to select the main instrument and all its Choose targets to All T modules default selection compensate Enabled only if Module Mainframe to select only the main instrument selected as target Module to select an individual module for compensation If you have selected Module as the target also choose the channel to be compensated from the pulldown list of channels C Factory Click to start Execute compensation Run the 6 Click the Execute button to begin execution of the compensation compensation Instructions to disconnect inputs and install dust covers on optical module channels and 50 ohm terminations on electrical module channels will appear on screen Be sure to follow static precautions see the user manual for your sampling module when following these instructions No
108. astability Reject on Zero typical trigger metastability CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual A 5 Appendix A Specifications Table A 3 System Trigger Cont Description Characteristics Internal clock trigger Rate selectable at 25 50 100 and 200 kHz internally and is provided rates to the trigger to the TDR stimulus drives in small sampling module interfaces and to the Internal Clock Out connector on the front panel 1 Theinput resistance at the external direct trigger input and the maximum input voltage Maximum signal input for maintaining calibrated time base operation 3 Section 4 10 2 in IEEE standard number 1057 The minimum signal levels required for stable edge triggering of an acquisition Table A 4 System Environmental Description Characteristics Dynamics Random vibration operating 0 10 g rms from 5 to 500 Hz 10 minutes each axis 3 axis 30 minutes total operating Random vibration nonoperating 2 00 g rms from 5 to 500 Hz 10 minutes each axis 3 axis 30 minutes total non operating Atmospherics Temperature Operating 0 C to 40 C 0 C to 35 C for 80EOX modules on Tektronix part number 012 1569 00 2 meter extender Nonoperating 22 C to 60 C Relative humidity Operating 20 to 80 with a maximum wet bulb temperature of 29 C ator below 50 C upper limits derates to 25 relative humidity at 50 C non condensing Nonoperating no floppy disk in flo
109. at follows to become familiar with the display adjustments the Main Time Base View you can make Overview To control the Main view Related control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 Set the vertical 4 display parameters The instrument must be installed with sampling modules we in place 4 The acquisition system should be setto run continuous 4 ly See the sampling Module user manuals for sampling module installation See page 3 23 for acquisition Also an appropriate trigger signal must be applied to setup and page 3 45 for trigger setup in this manual the instrument and triggering must be set up Push a Vertical Source button turns amber to assign the numbered buttons 1 8 to operate on channel reference or math waveforms Push a numbered button 1 8 to select the waveform it displays VERTICAL z m Z db a O e d Oo z A waveform button lights when its waveform is on m Lighted green waveform is on but not selected m Lighted amber waveform is on and selected Hint Step 4 assumes any reference or math N waveforms you select are defined See Table 3 2 on page 3 50 if you need help defining these waveforms N oO aN dv no En g L O TI T o m Use the Vertical knobs to achieve a good display of each waveform you select CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 55 Displaying Waveforms Overview To control the Main view Cont Related control e
110. ata measurement scalars are defined and so on See sampling module user manuals for sampling Note If you use a channel that is not acquiring ires Wird a acu ae including it in a math waveform that you turn on will PR 99 p implicitly cause itto be acquired ania Display 2 Press the Vertical MATH button twice if it is unlit once if TEEN the Math lighted to display the Define Math dialog box dialog box CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 93 Creating Math Waveforms Overview Select a math 3 waveform Build a math 4 expression Apply a filter 5 3 94 Click the Math Waveform drop down list in the dialog box and select a one of the eight available math waveforms M1 through M8 Be sure to click to check the On box so that the waveform displays Tip If the waveform you select already exists its math expression appears in the dialog box You can still use the waveform by clicking the Clear button which discards its previous math expression Or repeat step 3 to select another waveform Use the dialog box at right to define a math expression See Table 3 8 on page 3 91 for expression examples some guidelines for creating your expression follow m Sources C1 C8 R1 R8 and Measl Meas8 should be set up before you use them references and automated measurement scalars defined Elements that appear grayed out cannot be selected because they would result in an illegal entry For
111. ate see Trigger Source Connectors and connect the pretrigger signal CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Triggering Table 3 1 Application based triggering Cont Application Source to use Any application requiring that Setsource to External Direct or External P rescaler as the input signal provide the appropriate see Trigger Source Connectors Use a signal trigger splitter or power divider to couple to both the Ext Direct or P rescaler input and the input channel so that the sampled signal is also the trigger signal Any application requiring that Setsource to External Direct and use a Tektronix probe as you probe the trigger source described in Probe to Trigger Source Connection on page 3 41 Trigger Source and ESD Observe static precautions when coupling trigger sources to this instrument inputs to this instrument its sampling modules and accessory probes You must take proper precautions please read your sampling module user manual for more information CAUTION Electro static damage can permanently degrade and damage the Trigger Source Connectors External triggers can be connected to either the Trigger DIRECT or Trigger PRESCALE connectors on the front panel m Signals connected to the PRESCALE connector are divided by eight and then fed to the trigger circuits Although the divide ratio of the prescaler is fixed at eight it is randomized to prevent locking onto a particular bit in a bit stream w
112. ation 3 above are not settable directly but are derived You can however check the resolution at anytime in the resolution readout push the Horizontal Menu button Also note that the Resolution knob actually adjusts the record length to increase sample density detail CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Independent vs Shared Window For a given time base the instrument applies the same horizontal acquisition window to all channels from which it acquires data Unlike the vertical acquisition window that you set independently for each channel the same time division resolution record length and horizontal delay from the same trigger point that you set for a time base apply to all channels in that time base In other words one trigger from a single trigger source will locate a common horizontal acquisition window on all active channels which you can shift by setting the horizontal position control The horizontal acquisition window determines the waveform records extracted from all signals present at all active channels and math waveforms You can think of the horizontal acquisition window as cutting across any input signals present in the input channels to extract the same slice of time into waveform records See Figure 3 5 XC Common record start Chl record point and record length Co Mj pu Enea Common trigger Ch2 record JEEP d e O n l Common horizontal Ch3 record de
113. authenticity that accompanies the product software CD M the correct electrical and optical sampling modules shipped separately if ordered The sampling modules available for order for use with this instrument are listed on page 1 3 NOTE Any electrical and optical sampling modules ordered are shipped separately The sampling modules available for order for use with this instru ment are listed on page 1 3 Also any optional accessories ordered are shipped separately See Table 1 4 on page 1 36 for a list of optional accessories Remember to fill out and send in the customer registration card The registration card is packaged in an envelope in the shipping package CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 1 5 Installation 1 6 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Installation A NOTE Before beginning installation for the first time be sure to see Check the Package Contents on page 1 5 Then return to this installation section This section covers installation of the instrument addressing the following topics M Check the Environment Requirements on page 1 7 m Install the Sampling Modules on page 1 8 M Connect the Peripherals on page 1 11 Power On the Instrument on page 1 12 M Powering Off the Instrument on page 1 14 M Create an Emergency Startup Disk on page 1 14 m Back Up User Files on page 1 15 The basic operating software is already installed on the hard disk If reinstalla tion of software beco
114. avelength gain a custom input signal compensation 6 3 88 In Vert Setup dialog box click the User Wavelength Gain button under Compensation See right Follow the instructions on screen In the User Wavelength Gain Compensation dialog box set the wavelength and power of the signal to be applied to the channel See below Press the OK button to execute the compensation User Wavelength Gain Compensation EA User Wavelength al nm Power al Ww Cancel Repeat steps 2 6 and 7 for any additional optical channels you want to compensate End of Procedure Setup Utilities Help Triggere a I Horizonta Acquire Trigger Measurement Mask Display Histogram Cursors Winn Database TDR Compensate Dark Level User Wavelength Gain Compensate Dark Level User Wavelength Gain CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual ee l Creating Math Waveforms Once you have acquired waveforms or taken measurements on waveforms the instrument can mathematically combine them to create a waveform that supports your data analysis task For example you can define a math waveform that combines waveforms mathematically x You can also integrate a single waveform into an integral math waveform as is shown below Source waveform Math waveform iy Defining Math Waveforms This instrument supports mathematical combination and functional transforma tions
115. ays an actively acquiring waveform on screen with the noise reduced m Envelope mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen with the upper and lower extremes of the noise displayed 8 Test all channels Repeat steps 2 through 7 until all electrical input channels are verified 9 Remove the test hookup Disconnect the SMA cable from the channel input and the DC CALIBRATION output CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 1 25 Incoming Inspection Verify Optical Input Channels Channel buttons 1 26 After verifying the electrical channels and if you have an 80C00 Series Sampling Module installed you can now verify its the optical channels This verification is done without an input signal Equipment None required Prerequisites At least one optical 80C 00 series sampling module must be installed as outlined in its user manual 1 Initialize the instrument Push the front panel DEFAULT SETUP button 2 Set the Trigger System In the UI application toolbar select Internal Clock from the Trig list box as shown below Tekirronix Trig External Direct oov E External Direct H E ternal Prescaler E fA I E 3 100 0 3 Select the channel to test Push the channel button for the channel you want to test The button lights amber and the channel displays See Figure 1 9 VERTICAL MENU Internal Clack h Clack Recover 7 el E POSITION o OFFSET db Q A SC
116. bar select Setup and then select Mask See right Use the Mask Setup dialog box to set up for mask testing as you would for nonFrameScan acquisitions See Using Mask Testing on page 3 123 for information about using Mask testing Be sure to enable the mask Tip If you selected a communication standard when you setthe FrameScan bit rate see step 8 on page 3 33 the same standard will be preselected in the Mask Setup dialog box CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual To catch a bit error Control elements and resources See To Acquire in FrameScan Mode page 3 32 Setup Utilities Help Triagered Vertical Horizontal Acquire Trigger Measurement Displa Histogram Cursors Wim Database TDA FrameScan Acquisition when coupled with mask testing provides the tool you 3 35 Acquiring Waveforms Overview To catch a bit error Cont Control elements and resources Set conditional 6 From the application menu bar select Setup and then acquisition and select Acquisition start testing Stop After C Run Stop Button Only In the Acg Setup dialog box see right check the seme Condition option under Stop After Mask TotalHits 8 In the Condition pulldown list select Mask Total Hits and set a count of one in the count box These settings will stop acquisition on a violation of any of the masked areas on screen See below Waveform C1 55 00pWidiv Mask Mn C1 OC 7 48
117. ble In either case you must rebuild your hard drive using the procedure System Hard Drive Rebuild on page 1 17 Any files or programs you have installed will be lost Windows 98 Reinstall Only If you can access the instrument hard drive and you have your emergency startup disk you can reinstall Windows 98 from the hard drive This procedure is preferred over rebuilding the hard drive since the rebuild rewrites the entire hard drive 1 Power off the instrument Use the On Standby switch if possible if not use the principle power switch found at the back of the instrument 2 Ifa keyboard is not connected to the instrument connect it 3 Insert your emergency startup disk in the instrument floppy drive 4 Power on the instrument Make sure the principle power switch at the back of the instrument is set on Push the On Standby switch on the front panel 5 The instrument should now boot from the emergency startup disk and present you with a selection menu Use the arrow and enter keys to choose Start the computer without CDROM support 1 16 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Installation 6 At the a prompt type c Then type cd windows options cabs 7 Type setup Follow the instructions on screen NOTE At the a prompt you can type help at anytime to read a file that may be helpful in getting the Windows 98 operating system up and running System Hard Drive Rebuild If you cannot access the instrument hard drive you
118. c is checked in the dialog box automatically enables mask testing uncheck Enable Mask Counts if you want to turn off mask counting displays mask count statistics in the mask readout right of the display A mask does not have to be displayed to have mask counting enabled Check Use Wfm Database to use a waveform database as the waveform source Tip Selecting a source that is currently displayed as a waveform database automatically enables mask testing on the database To mask test the waveform instead of its database uncheck the Use Wfm Database box You can use the color pulldown list to change the color of the selected masks on screen You can add or subtract from the masks on screen Check On to turn on mask margins Adjust the Margin percentage box control to increase positive 96 s or decrease the masks on screen Click the Autoset button to perform an autoset on the mask source waveform Tip You can choose to autoset the mask source waveform to the mask anytime you select a new mask standard just check Automatic option under Autoset To Mask Test a Waveform Cont Related Control Elements and Resources Source Main C1 a IT Enable Mask Counts None Comm Standard T Use wfm Database Clear Display r Mask Color E Mask Margins r On Margin 5 0 aH Autoset C Automatic Manual Autoset CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases Over
119. c2 cal c4 cs ce c7 ca ida Backspace Clear Num amp vgs 2 Lyf Max al Filter Risetime fs BS Filter Mode Centered 3 Rl R2 R3 R4 221 E32 133 5 R5 R6 R R8 1 Bey Measurement Scalars Measl Meas2 Meas3 Measg Meas5 Meas6 Meas Meas Cancel Help CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Creating Math Waveforms Overview To define a math waveform Cont Related control elements amp resources Apply the 6 Once you have defined the math expression to your expression satisfaction click the Apply button Then click on the OK button to dismiss the dialog box See To Use Math Waveforms on page 3 97 for more procedures For more 7 Click the icon in the the upper right corner of the information Define Math dialog box and then click any dialog box control to pop up help on that control Click the Help button in the Define Math dialog box to access context sensitive overview on math waveforms See Accessing Online Help on page 3 145 for overview of the online help system End of Procedure Operations on Math Waveforms This instrument supports many of the same operations that it provides for channel live and reference waveforms For example you can measure math waveforms with cursors This section introduces these operations M Vertical display scaling and positioning m Taking automatic measurements m Ta
120. cal acquisition window on waveform amplitude NOTE Measurements use the entire portion of the waveform that the vertical window captures not only the portion displayed on screen Also waveforms exported or saved from the File menu or over the GPIB contain data from the entire vertical window not just the on screen portion Horizontal Acquisition Window Considerations You define the horizontal acquisition window that is you set several parameters that determine the segment of an incoming signal that becomes the waveform record when acquired For background please read Waveform Record on page 3 27 These common parameters specify a common horizontal acquisition window that is CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Acquiring Waveforms applied to all channels in parallel See Independent vs Shared Window on page 3 19 These parameters are M The external trigger signal that you input and set the trigger system to recognize determines the point relative to the input waveform that triggers the instrument M The horizontal position you set determines the horizontal delay from the trigger point to the first sample point in the acquisition window M The horizontal scale you set and the requirement that all waveforms fit within the 10 horizontal division display determines the horizontal duration of the window relative to any waveform allowing you to scale it to contain a waveform edge a cycle or several cycles Horizontal
121. cal measuring and test equipment CAN CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 9 Certifications and compliances cont Category Standards or description Installation Overvoltage Terminals on this product may have different installation overvoltage category designations The Category installation categories are CAT Ill Distribution level mains usually permanently connected Equipment at this level is typically in a fixed industrial location CAT Il Local level mains wall sockets Equipment at this level includes appliances portable tools and similar products Equipment is usually cord connected CATI Secondary signal level or battery operated circuits of electronic equipment Pollution Degree A measure of the contaminates that could occur in the environment around and within a product Typically the internal environment inside a product is considered to be the same as the external Products should be used only in the environment for which they are rated Pollution Degree 1 No pollution or only dry nonconductive pollution occurs P roducts in this category are generally encapsulated hermetically sealed or located in clean rooms Pollution Degree 2 Normally only dry nonconductive pollution occurs Occasionally a temporary conductivity that is caused by condensation m
122. cannot be adjusted directly You can adjust the offset of waveform sources waveforms included in the math expression for the math waveform if the sources are live waveforms Keys to Using The key points that follow describe operating considerations for setting up input scaling offset and position to properly acquire your waveforms Sampling Modules Selection and Signal Connection Select the sampling module optical or electrical that best fits your sampling task whether it is connecting to a fiber or electrical cable to test a digital data stream or to a test fixture through SMA cables to characterize a device The connection to the sampling module depends on your application Tektronix provides 80E00 series electrical and 80CO00 series optical sampling modules for this instrument you can read about any sampling module and its connections in the sampling module user manual s that shipped with your product Insert your sampling module user manual s in Appendix C at the back of this manual for ready reference You can also check your Tektronix catalog for connection accessories that may support your application Up to eight acquisition channels are available depending on the sampling modules installed Each channel can be displayed as a waveform or can contribute waveform data to other waveforms math and reference waveforms for example CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 5 Acquiring Waveforms A A CAUTION Install
123. capture the portion you want CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Acquiring Waveforms W Set horizontal scale to control the time duration of the horizontal acquisition window to capture as much as you want of the input signal s To control where in the input signal data stream that the horizontal acquisition window acquires you set horizontal position to delay the window relative to a trigger to capture the waveform portion you want To increase or decrease the resolution between sample points change the record length For more background on the acquisition window concepts see Signal Condition ing Background on page 3 12 What s Special A Versatile Autoset Autoset can be defined to set up for a waveform edge period or an eye bit pattern Pushing the Autoset button automatically sets up the instrument controls for a usable display based on the property you choose and the characteristics of the input signal Autoset is much faster and easier than a manual control by control setup You can also reset the instrument to its factory default settings by pushing the Default Setup button What s Excluded The vertical offset cannot be adjusted for any reference waveform because a reference waveform is a static saved waveform and offset adjusts the acquisi tion hardware for acquiring live waveforms Also TDR waveforms if displayed in rho or ohm units cannot be adjusted for vertical offset The vertical offset of a math waveform
124. channel mask such as FC531 for CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Data Input and Output testing channel 1 If later you display a gigabit ethernet signal in channel 1 and recall your saved setup the FC531 mask will display Avoiding Setup and Sampling Module Mismatches Recall of a setup assumes that that the sampling module appropriate to the recalled setup is installed For example recalling a setup that saved optical vertical control settings requires that an optical sampling module be installed If not the instrument substitutes default settings for the affected vertical controls settings instead of recalled settings Other examples of such mismatches include m Recalling a setup that includes TDR without the TDR capable sampling module installed You must have the TDR capable module installed in the same compartment it was in when the setup was saved m Recalling a setup that includes a clock recovery setup without the appropri ate clock recovery capable sampling module installed You must have the clock recovery capable module installed in the same compartment as when the setup was saved To Save Your Setup Use the procedure that follows to save a setup to the instrument hard disk a floppy disk or third party storage device CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 103 Data Input and Output Overview To save your setup Control elements amp resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must have appropriate sampling
125. controls and triggering must be setto acquire the signal From the application menu bar select Setup and then select Horizontal See right Setup Utilities Help Triaaered Vertical Acquire Trigger Measurement Mask Display Histogram Cursors Wim Database TDA In the Horz Setup dialog box click the Units Bits option All Timebases button Made Lock to Int TOKMH2 r Units Enter the total number of bits you wish to scan the AARE DENI Bits frame duration in the Scan Bits box You must always Comm Standard 22 1 Mbit EI setthis parameter manually Bit Rate i Frame Scan Tip You can set Units to Seconds if you prefer but Bi Goce ml Sule Peete Bits usually makes the set up and use of FrameScan Start Bit Scan Bits acquisition easier H 127 Reset Help Enter bits to be scanned CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Overview Set the bit rate 8 Set the horizontal scale so one acquisition record is equal to one bit Use one of the two methods that follow m Automatic If your signal to be scanned matches a communications standard select it from the Comm Standard list Choosing a standard sets the bit rate and start bit otherwise if you know the bit rate you can set the bit rate manually using the Bit Rate box Manual Adjust the Scale control to a setting that results in a display of both edges of the bit For example setting 1 8 of a bit
126. cted waveform Glossary 8 defined 3 7 Service support contact information xv Setup recalling 3 101 saving 3 101 Setups how to recall 3 106 how to save 3 103 including comments with 3 102 purpose of saving recalling 3 101 virtual keyboard with 3 102 Shipping package contents of 1 5 Signal connection and scaling overview 3 4 Signal conditioning background 3 12 Sin x x interpolation 3 60 Glossary 6 Slope Glossary 8 trigger 3 38 Software description 1 15 diagnostic QA Plus Win 1 32 1 33 emergency startup disk 1 14 installation 1 15 release notes 1 15 System Rebuild CD 1 3 User Interface application 1 3 Windows 98 1 3 SONET SDH standards supported 3 124 Sources trigger 3 39 Specifications conditions for meeting A 1 cooling A 7 data storage A 8 display A 7 environmental A 6 for instrument A 1 for sampling modules where to find A 1 mechanical A 8 ports A 7 power consumption A 7 signal acquisition A 1 time base A 2 trigger A 3 specifications A 1 Standard masks supported 3 124 Standard accessories 1 35 Statistics for histograms 3 138 Status bar 2 6 System diagnostics 1 17 System Rebuild CD 1 3 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual T TDS8000 description 1 1 Technical support contact information xv Tektronix contacting xv toll free number xv Temperature compensation 3 83 3 88 Test equipment for i
127. cy Glossary 1 Acquiring Waveforms 3 3 Acquisition Glossary 1 cycle 3 28 horizontal delay 3 27 horizontal delay time with Glossary 5 how to start and stop 3 25 input channels and digitizers 3 26 modes for starting and stopping 3 21 overview 3 25 preventing aliasing 3 22 record 3 27 record length 3 27 sample interval 3 27 sampling see Sampling 3 26 3 28 set Stop mode amp action 3 24 time base Glossary 8 trigger point 3 27 triggering 3 37 Acquisition control background 3 25 overview 3 19 Acquisition controls keys to using 3 20 vs Display controls 3 52 why use 3 20 Acquisition mode Average Glossary 2 Envelope Glossary 4 Sample Glossary 8 Acquisition modes description of 3 20 how to set 3 23 Acquisition settings purpose 3 20 Active cursor Glossary 1 Address Tektronix xv Aliasing 3 22 Glossary 1 Amplitude measurement B 1 CSAS000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Annotations Glossary 1 Application toolbar 3 115 Area measurement B 2 Attenuation Glossary 1 Attenuators external use of 3 6 Auto trigger mode 3 39 Automatic measurement Glossary 1 Overshoot B 2 Overshoot B 2 AC RMS B 1 Amplitude B 1 Area B 2 Average Optical Power B 3 Burst Width B 5 Crossing 96 B 3 Cycle Area B 2 Cycle Mean B 1 Cycle RMS B 1 Delay B 5 Duty Cycle Distortion B 3 Extinction Ratio B 3 Extinction Ratio 9
128. d Waveform Databases To Create a New Mask Masks are created by connecting the points independently of the order they are entered Points are connected by sorting the points in left to right order and grouping them across a diagonal from the left most point to the right most point If two points share the same horizontal position along either the left or right edge of the mask then the diagonal runs from the top left most point to the bottom right most point Points below the diagonal form the bottom boundary of the mask points above it form the top boundary Use the procedure that follows to create a mask from scratch Overview To create a new mask Related control elements amp resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must have atleast on waveform turned on and the Mask Setup dialog box displayed ue Z See Display Waveforms on page 3 47 for information on displaying waveforms None SONET 50H Fiber Channel Optical Fiber Channel Electrical C Other Select and display 2 To create a mask from scratch select User in the Comm Source a user defined Standard selection list Main C1 4 Enable Mask cons mask Tr F F F Create a 3 Click Mask Edit to display the Mask Edit dialog box PRN new mask Wm Database Hist Cursor Meas In the Mask list select the user defined mask you wish to Vet Hoz Aca Trig Mask TDR Di edit IN NN Mask Use the Vertex controls to a
129. d length is less than 500 points The instrument has two interpolation options linear or sin x x interpolation CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Glossary 5 Glossary Glossary 6 Linear interpolation calculates record points in a straight line fit between the actual values acquired Sin x x computes record points in a curve fit between the actual values acquired It assumes all the interpolated points fall in their appropriate point in time on that curve Icon See Channel Icon Initialize Setting the instrument to a completely known default condition by pressing executing a Default Setup Internal clock A trigger source that is synchronized to the internal clock with a selectable repetition rate It is most often used with TDR to synchronize the generation of TDR step pulses with subsequent acquisition Knob A rotary control Live Waveforms Waveforms that can update as the acquisition system acquires data Channel waveforms are live waveforms reference waveforms are not Math waveforms are live if they contain live waveforms in their expressions C1 RI defines a live math waveform R1 R2 does not Low The value used as 0 in automated measurements whenever high ref mid ref and low ref values are needed as in fall time and rise time measure ments May be calculated using one of three methods See High Low Tracking Method on page 3 69 for details more details LowRef The waveform low reference level Used i
130. dd position and delete 4 Vertices vertices on your new mask You may also drag and drop ve sie vertices directly on the graticule display Mask 6 NokDefined Mask 7 Not Defined Mask 8 Not Defined Click End Mask Edit when you are finished creating your mask to apply all additions changes and return to the Mask Setup dialog box Vertex Read Helpful Hints immediately following this procedure Hee i F E for more information on creating masks 16 08 mE 500 0 Bs Add Delete End Mask E dit Help CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 133 Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases Taking Histograms 3 134 Histogram Why Use What s Special End of Procedure The instrument can display histograms constructed of waveform data You can display both vertical voltage and horizontal time histograms but only one at a time Histogram Box Histogram Readout E TIT uw aweton i Main C1 7 56 00p idiv 4 Histgmi ees Mean 262 FV Median 254 3 v Std Dev 13 55p V s we Fk Pk 149 4p o o J etio 733895 i wate 955 pi3c 996 Peak 20835304 Hits 35251143 wW virms B51818 foco 59 c5 c5 c c oc oc 2c HMo Oc ee o6 Figure 3 29 Vertical histogram view and statistics on data Use histogram statistics to analyze a range of data that you select Some histogram features of note follow Flexible Histogram Editing You can use the controls in
131. dent failures Subframe 1 lt Subframe 3 lt Subframe 5 Subframe 2 lt Subframe 4 Ah Ah l Ah Ah gt M Subframe 1 Subframe 2 Subframe 3 Subframe 4 Subframe 5 Accumulated acquisitions Notes Ah is the horizontal position change one bit period 1 bit rate Subframe acquisition duration is 40 greater than the bit period Figure 3 10 How FrameScan acquisition works scanning on a 127 bit PRBS shown CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 31 Acquiring Waveforms To Acquire in FrameScan Mode Overview Prerequisites 1 Access the 5 FrameScan controls Set the frame 6 duration 3 32 Use the procedure that follows to set up the instrument to acquire in FrameScan mode To acquire in FrameScan mode Control elements and resources The instrument must have an appropriate sampling module in place before powering on the instrument Instrument must be powered up The signal to be scanned must be input to a channel and an appropriate external framing signal must be x applied to the trigger input See sampling module user manuals for sampling module installation m See page 3 23 for acquisition setup and The acquisition mode must be set to Sample or s page 3 45 for trigger setup in this manual Average Envelope cannot be used with FrameScan acquisitions The vertical and horizontal
132. deskewed to fill the screen horizontally Setup the channel to be deskewed repeat step 4 for the channel to be deskewed Push Vertical MENU front panel button and from the Vertical Setup dialog box adjust the Deskew value see right to make the edges of the reference and the deskew channel coincide or are as close as possible If you cannot align the edges completely try selecting the reference channel and adjusting its deskew See right To deskew between channels Control elements and resources Function 8 oQo enerator G g Q GN es ae lal oee HORIZONTAL MENU MENU A POSITION VIEW 4 POSITION b VW 5 S N O1 A C N a E SCALE 4 SCALE D Channel Offset U 0 Deskew 20 Oops ard Units Auto CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Measuring Waveforms Overview To deskew between channels Cont Control elements and resources Deskew 9 Ifyou need to you can deskew additional channels anal more channels Internal Clock 200kHz Ez Steps Manual Step Deskew 10 Turn off the channel just deskewed and leave the reference channel on Channels c c o o EF Help 11 Setup the channel to be deskewed repeat step 6 and step 7 forthe new channel to be deskewed 12 Continue this process for as many channels as you want to deskew Disconnectthe deskew hookup End of Procedure To Perform Dark
133. e Area Ar Wil Cycle Area B 2 Category and Definition Area measurement The area over the entire waveform or gated region in vertical units over horizontal units such as volt seconds and watt seconds Area measured above ground is positive area below ground is negative Algorithm follows If Start End then return the interpolated value at Start Otherwise Waveform t dt Area Start Area measurement The area over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region vertical units over horizontal units such as volt seconds and watt seconds Area measured above ground is positive area below ground is negative CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported Eye Pattern and Optical Measurements Table B 3 Supported eye pattern optical measurements Name EK EB amp e a E Bh Bt CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Average Optical Power Average Optical Power dBm Crossing Duty Cycle Distortion Extinction Ratio Extinction Ratio Extinction Ratio dB Eye Height Eye Width Jitter RMS Jitter Pk Pk Category and Definition Eye pattern optical measurement This measurement is not actually is taken on an acquired waveform rather it is taken by the hardware in the optical sampling module Average Optical Power only measures optical channels taken at a rate of one reading per second Eye pattern optical measurement T
134. e A 1 System Signal acquisition eee A 1 Table A 2 System Timebase eere A 2 Table A 3 System Trigger een A 3 Table A 4 System Environmental A 6 Table A 5 CSA8000 and TDS8000 Power consumption And COOUNG 6525565 4 5 5695 be 5845455 55 884s ritsari A 7 Table A 6 CSA8000 and TDS8000 Display A 7 Table A 7 CSA8000 and TDS8000 Data storage A 8 Table A 8 CSA8000 and TDS8000 Mechanical A 8 Table A 9 Certifications and compliances A 9 Table B 1 Supported amplitude measurements B 1 Table B 2 Supported area measurements B 2 Table B 3 Supported eye pattern optical measurements B 3 Table B 4 Supported timing measurements B 5 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Table of Contents List of Figures Figure 1 1 Compartments for sampling modules 1 9 Figure 1 2 Maximum inputs in three configurations 1 10 Figure 1 3 Locations of peripheral connectors on rear panel 1 11 Figure 1 4 Line fuse and power cord connector locations Fear Panel cc 5252 9299 Rack RERO CDs 4ed se dg GP PM FER ENS 1 12 Figure 1 5 On Standby switch location 1 13 Figure 1 6 Compensation dialog box 1 22 Figure 1 7 Hookup for el
135. e and other documentation for this instrument follow M Use online help when you want to minimize interruption to your work flow Often a tool tip or What s This Help each of which pop up brief informa tion in a bubble displayed on screen gives you enough support to continue your setup Overview help is there when you need to probe more deeply into feature operation M Use the manuals to read instructions on putting the instrument into service procedures on reinstalling its product software listings of specifications and overviews of features and their operation See Documentation Map on page 2 2 for an description of the documents for this instrument and their purposes M Use the online programmers guide either displayed on the instrument screen or on any windows equipped PC for support on operating the instrument from the GPIB CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 145 Accessing Online Help How to Use Online Help Use the procedure steps that follow to access contextual help and to learn how to search the help system for more information Overview To use the online help Control elements amp resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must be powered up and running m See Installation page 1 7 For a brief 2 Move your mouse pointer and let it rest over a control File Edit View Setup Utilities Help description of that is a menu name a menu item tool bar button gu
136. e settings are applied but the data is not restored M Waveforms in Math Waveforms M1 M8 Control settings and the math expression are retained but not the waveform data Upon setup recall the recalled math waveform expressions will be applied but there is math no math waveform data to restore Instead a new math waveform will be generated based on the recalled expression User Options that are stored in the Windows Registry These include all options accessed by first selecting Utilities menu bar and then User Preferences Utilities menu m Standard Masks Standard masks are not stored with the setups However if your recalled setup includes display of a mask recalling the setup will in turn display the mask Also masks you define are stored with the setups The key points that follow describe operating considerations for setting up the saving and recalling of setups All Settings are Retained The instrument includes almost all instrument settings with a few exceptions such as user options in the saved setup Retaining Current Settings Recalling a setup replaces the current setup with the recalled setup If you do not want to lose your current setup save it to its own setup file for later recall before you recall the new setup Avoiding Setup Waveform Mismatches Saved setups may contain settings inappropriate for waveforms currently in your instrument For example you might have saved a setup that displayed a fiber
137. e settings you make for High Low method and always uses the Mean of Histogram method If you set the signal source to type Pulse the discussion of High Low Method that follows below applies Databases as Sources Behavior Consider the following operating behaviors regarding measurements and databases B When enabling a measurement it will always measure the waveform database if the measurement source you choose is currently displayed as a waveform database You can measure the waveform instead of its database if you turn off Use Wfm Database in the Meas setup dialog box If you assign a database to a waveform already being used as a source for an automatic measurement it will not automatically measure the waveform database you must explicitly specify its use by turning on Use Wfm Database in the Meas Setup dialog box High Low Tracking The levels that the automatic measurement system derives as the High Top or Low Bottom for a waveform influence the fidelity of amplitude and aberration measurements For many of the automatic measure ments supported the instrument automatically determines these levels and disables all or some of the High Low tracking method controls for example CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Measuring Waveforms RMS If the measurement you select has High Low methods that are appropriate to adjust or example RISE time the instrument automatically enables the method controls for your adjustment as
138. e you can display measure or analyze a waveform you must acquire it from a signal This instrument comes equipped with the features you need for capturing your waveforms The following topics provide an overview of captur ing signals and digitizing them into waveform records M Signal Connection and Scaling How to connect signals to the instrument channels how to offset channels and position and scale the time bases for acquiring waveforms how to scale and position waveforms in the display B Setting Acquisition Controls How to choose the appropriate acquisition mode for acquiring your waveforms how to start and stop acquisition M Acquisition Control Background Information describing the data sampling and acquisition processes m FrameScan Acquisitions How to use FrameScan acquisition to help analyze pattern dependent failures in high bit rate communications signals Signal processing amp transformation system User Interface and display Acquisition system Trigger Time base system system NOTE This section describes how the vertical and horizontal controls define the acquisition of live channel waveforms These controls also define how all waveforms are displayed both live and derived waveforms math and reference waveforms The sections that follow cover display related usage follow m Displaying Waveforms on page 3 47 M Creating Math Waveforms on page 3 69 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 3 Ac
139. each of Cursor 1 and Click to access sources sor sources Cursor 2 select a source Cursor 1 N m To measure a single source choose the same pod mants source for both cursors Main C1 for example T E C3 m Tomeasure two different sources in the same time r base make sure the time bases match Main CB C1 and Main C2 for example p Math amp Ref sources m To measure two different sources in different time appear if defined Peferd te bases select different waveforms and time i Magl amp Mag2 Mao bases Main C1 and Mag1 C2 for example ag amp Mage SDUICES M appear if displayed MET Tip References and Math waveforms are listed as sources only if defined and turned on All sources listed for the Main time base are also listed for the Mag1 and Mag2 time bases if the time base views are displayed on screen End of Procedure Optimizing Measurement Accuracy Why Use The procedures given here will increase the accuracy of the measurements you take Compensation This instrument can compensate itself and the sampling modules installed optimizing the internal signal path used to acquire the waveforms you measure Compensation optimizes the capability of the instrument to make accurate measurements based on the ambient temperature NOTE After first installing a sampling module s or moving a sampling module from one compartment to another you should run comp
140. ecalls each waveform into one of the reference waveform locations R1 R8 Also you cannot save and recall waveform databases 3 108 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Data Input and Output To Save Your Waveform Use the procedure that follows to save a waveform or waveforms to the instrument hard disk a floppy disk or third party storage device Overview To save a waveform Control elements amp resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must have appropriate sampling modules in place before powering on the instrument Instrument must be powered up Make sure the waveform to be saved exists that is your source must be a channel an active math waveform or an active reference Display the waveform in the timebase in which you want to save it Main1 Magl and or Mag2 or the waveform will not appear in the Save Waveform dialog box For help in setup and acquiring waveforms check the references at right Display the 3 From the application menu bar select File and then Save Waveform select Save Waveform See right dialog box The Save Waveform dialog box lists all available waveforms for all displayed timebases allows for browsing to destination directory Saving to file or for selecting a reference saving to one of R1 R8 It also includes a field for adding your comments See below Save Waveform s RIES Select waveforms Save selected waveform s to C Reference R
141. ect Recall Setup See right i mem Acc dialog box CHA MICE The Recall Setup dialog box allows navigation to directories lists setup files in the directory and provides ate host i Esport Waveform for selection of a setup file Comments for selected files Print Ctrl P appear in the comment box See below Print Setup Recent RIE Recall Setup AES Exit Lookin Setups AA AT es a8 Current stp a ProtoE yall stp ix EveHistagram stp ix ProtoE valla stp ix FrameScan l stp C1 File name Gbyte ther stp al Files of type Setup Files stp Cancel Comment Does mask test on StarComm prata Help Requires 1 elect sampling module in See Test Spec GByteMask d Deiat Name a 3 Use the Look in drop down list and buttons see right Recall Selup destination to navigate to the directory which contains a setup that NE EE m ook in SM Documents t sz i88 you want to recall 3 106 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Data Input and Output Overview To recall your setup Cont Control elements amp resources Select your 4 If not selected select stp in the Save as type of file to setup include in the dialog box file listing Setup files are always type stp Tip Only change the type if you want to temporarily see M ProtoE vals01 B any other types of files in the current directory a ProtoE vals02 stp Otherwise leave it set at
142. ectable for triggering rates that depend on the sampling module used for example CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 39 Triggering 3 40 either 622 Mbps OC 12 STM 4 standards or 2 488 Gbps OC 48 STM 16 standards for the 80C01 CR Optical Sampling Module 000000005 00 eae Oop0200 Internal Clock Output Trigger Trigger Prescale Direct Input Input Figure 3 13 Trigger inputs Trigger Probe Power Use a trigger source that is synchronized with the signal you are sampling and displaying Selection of your trigger source depends on your application as shown in Table 3 1 Table 3 1 Application based triggering Application Communications optical data signals with embedded clock TDR measurement using an electrical sampling module equipped with TDR Measurements on systems with a synchronized pretrigger signal Source to use Set source to Clock Recovery and set the clock recovery type and use an optical sampling module equipped with a clock recovery option supporting the recovery of the clock signal Set source to Internal Clock to use the internal clock of the instrument TDR clock and select the appropriate clock frequency Disconnect any signal connected to the External 10MHz Reference Input when using the Internal clock Setsource to External Direct or External P rescaler as appropri
143. ective product This warranty applies only to products returned to the designated Tektronix depot or the Tektronix authorized representative from which the product was originally purchased For products returned to other locations Customer will be assessed an applicable service charge The preceding limitation shall not apply within the European Economic Area where products may be returned for warranty service to the nearest designated service depot regardless of the place of purchase In order to obtain service under this warranty Customer must provide the applicable office of Tektronix or its authorized representative with notice of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix or its representative with shipping charges prepaid Tektronix or its representative shall pay for the return of the product to Customer Customer shall be responsible for paying any associated taxes or duties This warranty shall not apply to any defect failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance and care Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install repair or service the product b to repair damage resultin
144. ectrical functional tests 1 24 Figure 1 8 Channel button location 1 25 Figure 1 9 Channel button location ee 1 26 Figure 1 10 Optical channel verification 1 27 Figure 1 11 Hookup for the time base tests 1 28 Figure 1 12 Channel button location 1 29 Figure 1 13 Main time base verification 1 30 Figure 1 14 Mag time base verification 1 31 Figure 3 1 Acquisition and display controls 3 4 Figure 3 2 Setting vertical scale and position of input channels 3 14 Figure 3 3 Varying offset positions vertical acquisition window on waveform amplitude eee 3 16 Figure 3 4 Horizontal acquisition window definition 3 17 Figure 3 5 Common trigger record length and acquisition rate fOr all ehannels 1224293 pac3 Eo 9 RACRCREUROR E SURE UE Ede 3 19 Figure 5 0 Aliasing 5 5 645 sew bei oe ORAE EUR CR ORARE ON Ro a DER ans 3 22 Figure 3 7 Channel configuration eee 3 26 Figure 3 8 Digital acquisition sampling and digitizing 3 27 Figure 3 9 The waveform record and its defining parameters 3 28 Figure 3 10 How FrameScan acquisition works scanning on a 127 bit PRBS shown eeeeee nnn 3 31 Figure 3 11 Slope and level define the trigger event
145. ed data There are three options for interpolation Sin x x interpolation computes record points using a curve fit between the actual values acquired The curve fit assumes all the interpolated points fall along that curve Sin x x interpolation is particularly useful when acquiring more rounded waveforms such as sine waves Sin x x interpolation may introduce some overshoot or undershoot in signals with fast rise times Linear interpolation computes record points between actual acquired samples by using a straight line fit The straight line fit assumes all the interpolated points fall in their appropriate point in time on that straight line Linear interpolation is useful for many waveforms such as pulse trains None turns interpolation off Only points actually sampled appear in the displays of waveform records CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Displaying Waveforms To Set Display Styles Use the procedure that follows to become familiar with the display styles you can set Overview To set display styles Related control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must be powered up with any waveform you wantto display on screen See page 3 23 for acquisition setup and page 3 45 for trigger setup Accessthe 2 Fromthe application menu bar select Setup and then Setup Utilities Display setup select Display See right dialog box vertical Hari zontal Acquire Trigger
146. ed as a waveform database the database will automatically be measured Uncheck the User Wfm Database option if you wantto measure the waveform instead of the database For more in 11 Press the Help button in the Meas Setup dialog box to formation access the online help See Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported on page B 1 for a list of the measurements and their l definitions See page 3 145 to learn about using online help End of Procedure 3 74 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Measuring Waveforms To Localize a Measurement Overview Prerequisites Access the gates Enable and position the gates Use the procedure that follows to set gates on a measurement source which forces the measurement to be taken over a segment of the waveform otherwise the entire waveform feeds the measurement Set up as from last procedure From the application menu bar select Setup and then select Measurement See right Select the Region tab to expose the gate controls Click to check the box as indicated right to turn gating on and to display the gates on screen If Annotations are not on click the Annotations box or the gates will not display Use the G1 Gate and G2 spin controls or click and type in values see right to adjustthe gates on screen such that the area to measure is between the gates Tip Values are entered as a of the waveform displayed from left to right If no keyboard is
147. ee discussion on page 3 17 Push Set to 50 if required to stabilize display CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual MENU VEW POSITION MAIN RESOLUTION SET A DETAIL 4 SCALE gt Z POSITION A OFFSET NV amp SCALE NZ HORIZONTAL TRIGGER Acquiring Waveforms Overview To set the signal input Related control elements and resources Continue with 6 To finish the acquisition setup you must set the the acquisition acquisition mode and start the acquisition Z setup See To Set Up Acquisition Controls on page 3 23 For more help m For more information on the controls described in this procedure push the Vertical or Horizontal MENU button Click the HELP button in the setup dialog box that displays End of Procedure 3 10 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Acquiring Waveforms To Autoset the Instrument With an input signal connected use the procedure that follows to autoset based on the characteristics of the input signal Autoset operates on the selected channel only Overview To autoset Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must be installed with sampling modules in in place Signals must be connected to channels A triggering source must be provided 4 Atleast one channel must be turned on its front panel See the sampling module user manuals for help with button lighted installing sampling modules See page 3 45 in
148. ee noes eee Saeed USE dH d 3 29 Breakthrough time base stability ossozenkuiscr ey9x3e e RR s 3n 3 29 Flexible setup SUpport ac 22 6 29 95 8 lade oe deee pie SFR od Pet dn 3 29 Identification and analysis of pattern dependent failures 3 29 Improved noise resolution on low power communication signals 3 29 Whats Excluded 2552929 4 93 5 doses 905 53919691902 Gen CR Ded c Er ron ce 3 30 Keys 10 USS ET EEEE EEEE PEENTE NST 3 30 Determine Start Bit and Scan Bits o22 64sse en8 eg SERRE d E ERROR ue 3 30 How FrameScan Mode Acquires 0000 ee eee eee eee 3 30 To Acquire in Frame scan Mod 2006622865608 SIS EUER y drini sdis 3 32 To X tI DID EIE tenets seco EE quur EIE ERO P FERES qd der 3 35 TEIGOOEIBIS 2 sachs VERG Wd VS TEES SENE TREE RS eee SEEN Va A 3 37 ESO THIPPCIHHP 2292 7252 49 29 9 pense M dexda deas ndis 3 37 bu sfr A 3 37 bc Vu x Pr 3 37 Clock RECOYETY sana nrAa2 Rie ATE NOSE JUR e SUA Eat 3 37 Keys O USINE A r 3 37 Wee Serine Process 22399524 2058 heed Hoek Hoard Huge Rd m don 3 37 Triggering is Global usas oh coed Hoek Road osque ead m doa 3 38 Edge Irigger TUB esa xh amd Hoes Peur d eque dud m doa 3 38 Taize Moles wo eus ote RA Hees Road Negare MUN A m dd t 3 39 Tager l D MC 3 39 Tigger Source dud ESD a uus ame conss deor d osqune euer a eae 3 41 Trigger Source Connectors aeu ardore deen Road sser arurae eae 3
149. eee WERPSROS IE EE ER SE Sd aS ys eed p edes Witt S cdgobq rrr A VEESQUHIE OSes ee csek aga dw Gun 9 der uUa e SMOCOHING UR poe UE What s Eac Udo Av D nrp Keys 6 USNS ooe en E a e eee Ree en A E E a ee eS ees Sampling Modules Selection and Signal Connection Couplin COGCCiNG tcc040seeiuwceerersinceteuced a aE Ph died Scaling Offset and Positioning Considerations Weis serand Disolay oso wirds uada med qr CES OPES sages 9 3 aedes I L Ld I I I A A Selected Way Clore esses eriden aaa a e a a E a eat Flexible Control ACCESS cs peas pua us etE raei ehai Geese pace To Set Up the Signal Input 2222209 3 3 aq mE U nenir eenia ee eed To Autoset the Instrument usu ea ede rs Re e REESE ETARREXPRa ceeds EE To Reset the Inst utei cecaceudeecessna Gece PETAT EX DAS RE Ee RP Signal Conditioning Background aussen eee EE ene ERA REESE nr rrr Autoset Considerations 1522 2 950 0 9 R9 pausa ages Geese ot Vertical Acquisition Window Considerations 045 Horizontal Acquisition Window Considerations Horizontal Scale vs Record Length vs Sample Interval vs ico P ReT I Independent vs Shared Window llle Setting Acquisition Controls 2 isasso sd ERR DRE EG ERR RE Red deen es Wily ie rrr Whats SPcClal wes200 eset e tacos eS EU Eds deen Sd seeds en ee Stop After Options gcocatacdiaeasaeea db een 0 ene eeutne
150. efer to Trigger System Internal Clock Typical performance into 50 Q termination 0 20 to 40 20 V low level 0 90 to 1 10 V high level DC voltage from low impedance drive programmable to 1 mV over 1 25 V range maximum Accuracy is 0 1 mV 4 0 196 5 V maximum Table A 7 CSA8000 and TDS8000 Data storage Specifications Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive ca pacity Characteristics 3 5 in floppy disk 1 44 Mbyte compatable with DOS 3 3 or later format for storing reference waveforms image files and instrument Setups gt 6 Gbytes CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 8 CSA8000 and TDS8000 Mechanical Specifications Construction material Weight Overall Dimensions Overall mass pack aged product Overall Dimensions packaged product Certifications Table A 9 Certifications and compliances Category Standards or description Characteristics Chassis Aluminum alloy Cosmetic covers PC ABS thermoplastic Front panel Aluminum alloy with P C thermoplastic overlay Module doors Nickel plated stainless steel Bottom cover Vinyl clad sheet metal Circuit boards Glass laminate Cabinet Aluminum 20 8 kg 45 Ib 12 02 Height 343 mm 13 5 in Width 457 mm 18 0 in Depth 419 mm 16 5 in The dimensions do not include feet rack mount kit or protruding connectors 36 3 kg 80 Ib 1 oz Height 622 mm 24 5 in Width 711 mm 28 0 in
151. eform even if a trigger event does not occur Auto mode uses a timer that starts after trigger rearm If the trigger circuit does not detect a trigger after this timeout about 100 ms it auto triggers forcing enough trigger events to acquire all active channels In the case of repetitive acquisitions in automatic trigger mode waveform samples are acquired but at different places in the data stream synchroniza tion is lost See Figure 3 12 Automatic trigger mode If you do not apply a signal to any channel displayed a baseline is displayed for that channel Triggered waveform waveforms az Normal trigger mode Automatic M mode Figure 3 12 Triggered versus untriggered displays Trigger Sources The trigger source provides the signal that the trigger system monitors The source can be B the internal clock of the instrument TDR clock rate with user selectable clock frequencies The Internal Clock Out connector supplies a replica of the internal clock at the instrument front panel See Figure 3 13 on page 3 40 M an external signal coupled to one of the trigger input connectors see Figure 3 13 on the front panel m External Direct DC coupled and usable with signals up to at least 3 0 GHz m External Prescale divided by 8 and usable with signals up to at least 12 5 GHz M an internal clock recovery trigger provided by an optical sampling module equipped with the clock recovery option Clock recovery is user sel
152. eform record and is calculated as EORT Horiz Position 1 0 01 x Horiz Ref x Time Div x 10 divisions Channel Deskew For example EORT 6 us 1 0 1 5 x 1 us div x 10 div 0 6us 5u l us when Horizontal position 6 us Horizontal Ref 50 Time Division I us div Channel Deskew 0 set to minimum CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 43 Triggering 3 44 In this example because 11 us is greater than 5 us the current control settings determine the minimum usable holdoff the instrument can use Trigger point Horizontal position Horizontal delay 19 ns min Time Time of first point zero Time to EORT 75e EORT LM v Horizontal Time of last point reference point EORT Figure 3 15 Trigger to End Of Record Time EORT Requested vs Actual Holdoff The instrument operates with two holdoff values m Requested the last value requested in the Trigger Setup dialog box You can set times from 5 us 50 ms but the time requested becomes the actual time used only if it meets the requirements just described for Actual Otherwise the holdoff time value requested is held for later use as described for Actual M Actual the holdoff time in effect that is the time the instrument is using or will use when acquiring data The instrument uses it when the minimum usable holdoff determined as described in Usable Holdoff above is greater than the requested va
153. elect Display See right Use the graticule controls to select a graticule style Selectthe color of the screen from the Background pulldown list Select the color of the graticule from the Foreground pulldown list Click the X button to close the Setup Display dialog box Click the l icon in the the upper right corner of the Display Setup dialog box and then click any dialog box control to pop up help on that control Click the Help button in the Display Setup dialog box to access a context sensitive overview of the display controls and their set up End of Procedure Dr Copy Send To Back Color Grade Properties cs a 109 0mvi EL pov Setup Utilities Vertical Hari zontal Acquire Trigger Medsuremerit Mask eee B Cursors W fm Database See Accessing Online Help on page 3 145 for overview of the online help system CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual r Measuring Waveforms To assist you in analyzing the waveforms you acquire the instrument comes equipped with cursors and automatic measurements This section describes these tools and how you use them m Taking Automatic Measurements on page 3 66 describes how you can set up the instrument to automatically measure and display a variety of waveform parameters See Figure 3 18 m Taking Cursor Measurements on page 3 77 describes using cursors to make amplitude and time measure
154. elements amp resources Recall your 7 Click the Recall button to save the waveform file To waveform cancel without recalling a waveform click Close button Close Help For more 8 For more help on recalling waveforms press the Help information button in the dialog box to access contextual online help See page 3 145 to learn about using online help End of Procedure 3 114 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Data Input and Output To Clear References Overview Display the 1 Clear Refer ences dialog box Select Refs 2 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Click to select the reference to clear If you have a keyboard installed you can hold down the control key and click to select multiple references for deletion Click the Clear button to delete click the close button to dismiss the dialog box You can clear individual references of data individually or all at once If a reference is listed as active and you are sure you do not want the data it contains use the procedure that follows to clear it You can clear any active reference listed of RI R8 To clear a reference Control elements amp resources From the application menu bar select Edit and then select Clear References See right File Edt View Setup Utilities Help foot fetes emu Etri FE Paste Str Fy Gh EM Bopp ravea SES S BVETBITTT Delete v aT Define Math Clear References Clear Data
155. elements and resources Prerequisites 1 Instrument must be installed with sampling modules in place before powering on the instrument Instrument must be powered up with horizontal and vertical controls setup Triggering should also be set up To select an 2 Push the Acquisition MENU button to display the Acq acquisition Mode Setup dialog box Select the 3 Click an option button to select the acquisition mode acquisition Mode choose from the following modes m Sample m Average m Envelope Set a For Average mode only enter the number of samples to sample count to average in the Average box CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual See the sampling module user manuals for sampling module installation See page 3 45 for trigger setup MENU Setups Ea Mask TOR Disp WEmDB Hist Cursor Vert Hore Acq Trig Meas Acquisition Mode Envelope dri IE Stop After 3 23 Acquiring Waveforms Overview To set acquisitions modes Control elements and resources Set the Stop 4 Under Stop After click one of the following options a mode and action Stop After Run Stop Button Only C Condition Single Sequence m Run Stop Button Only m Condition If you selected Condition choose a condition from the drop down list such as Number of Acquisitions or Mask Total Hits to stop on If the condition requires a count count box is enabled enter a count Stop Action None F
156. en Or mm you can set cursor values directly using the procedure referenced at right See To Set the Cursor Sources on page 3 82 Press the CURSORS button see right P ress m once to display vertical bar cursors shown below DEFAULT J Cane I Er CURSORS SELECT Ly m twice to display horizontal bar cursors JSSUS BON C AFR f mus M m a third time to display waveform based cursors Press the SELECT button to toggle selection between the two cursors The active cursor is the solid cursor Turn the General Purpose knob to position each cursor on the waveform to measure the feature that interests you File Edi View Setup Utilities Help Triggered Waveforms 0 Tektronix 7 XJ ajz fef nije AS Aca Mode 5 ample Tri E teal Direct 7 ov ee 50 ke fAmpitude z RR mnn cn nc nn or j Se nn e re linen EA laa S w Mi PRT PARE NL ege PH TR TEN EB dade Ee EN Ve Nd E a DROP I PEST e VR RAE e IP ETT MIR Waveform tht La C1 50 00pW div i WimDB1 Main c l pore ues un Cursora fin C1 RE 1894ns A d 112 2055ns x QAI reos A 4 Wat 6219MHz r3 S Read the results in the cursor readout In the figure shown above waveform cursors are used to measure the bit time of the eye diagram Tip The cursor readout indicates the source time base and waveform for the selected cursor in this case the main time base M1 and channel 1 C1 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual
157. en es FrameScan M Acquisition cesse Whats Excl ded d C Keys tO USDE T T r Acquisition Modes sr dass SERRE ERES dh ew ee ded d REA s Acquisition Control ics iu das aria PUER RUE RES 23 dcn eee oak ees Global Controls so sas dae dass ieu bReISEC LP F ASSUM E EE Preventing Aliasing uouququsedicesukbesurkEe dh ee S dp e dde os Methods to Check and Eliminate Aliasing 005 TO Set Acquisition Modes ue ics iier a EE did bem dp dee o 12 39 POE E To Start and Stop Acquisition 0 cece eee eee eee Co W O9 O29 W OW W WW WwW W U9 W W LO ON 09 Q2 b2 b2O b2 SONN NN ON QN Un CA CA CA CA I d d d P d d idili me e me e NONNNNNYNNNNNNWNN eee UU l2b2 c ccc Cc Cc O O oon Oo W WW O9 W GO O9 O92 Lo W O9 W O2 O9 UW O2 li CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Table of Contents Acquisition Control Background Jj usse E ERRM does oh Chak RSE OER 3 25 ZACOUISIH OR Had wWa 7 kane oe eae eect owe dee rad eds bai di pu i 3 26 SaMIPUMC PIOCESS lt 6 5460445 boned TERES EX RENS DRE Ni Ed eee 3 26 DaBpune NIOUGS 2 29539523 ounces PUES SE URBIS NIS AS SIRE ERI 3 27 Mav lora IS CORO earar nae dd QUEE IP OSA SRM ADES EUH E DIE EHE d 3 27 PACAUISINON CC GIO nasi mes ds 666604 ERES UE SAM E SI EE oped Edd d 3 28 FPramesScan ACCUISINONS eo canon 65 derriere ES EHE eee E NI eg SECA ed as aen 3 29 DU ZU EE 3 29 Mats Special geuaneeeeeese ce e
158. ensation from the Utilities menu to ensure the instrument meets it specifications CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 83 Measuring Waveforms To Compensate the Use the following procedure to optimize the instrument for the current tempera Instrument and Modules ture to enhance measurement results Overview To perform a compensation Related control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 Instrument should have the sampling modules installed and be powered on Allow a 20 minute warm up See Install the Sampling Modules on page 1 8 Display the 2 From the application menu bar select Utilities and then Utilities Waveforms Compensation select Compensation See right Define Autoset dialog box Autoset In the Compensation dialog box the main instrument Unde Autoset mainframe and sampling modules are listed Run Stop The temperature change from the last compensation is Peine also listed See below Calibration Compensation h inanartiar Compensation El El Current DateTime 11 Way 00 13 25 Mainframe Serial 7 Date Time TOS CS48000 B nDDOD 11 May 00 13 25 Pass O 2 C w Compensate Upper Sampling Modules p Serial Date Time Status 1 Buc CR P2048 11 May 00 13 25 Pass D u c All m IB Storage Serial z Date Time Status 1 overriden by upper modules fe eer 2 overriden by upper modules 3 S80E04 BES 11 May 0013 25 P
159. ensations 3 87 To Recall Your Setup 3 106 To Recall Your Waveform 3 112 To Reset the Instrument 3 12 To Save Your Setup 3 103 To Save Your Waveform 3 109 To Set Acquisition Modes 3 23 To Set Display Styles 3 61 Index 7 Index To Set the Cursor Sources 3 82 To set up a waveform database 3 141 To Acquire in FrameScan mode 3 32 To Catch a Bit Error 3 35 To Set Up the Signal Input 3 8 To Start amp Stop Acquisition 3 25 To Take a Histogram 3 136 To Take Automatic Measurements 3 72 3 81 To trigger 3 45 To Use an Exported Waveform 3 117 To Use Math Waveforms 3 97 To use online help 3 146 Windows 98 reinstall 1 16 Procedures in the online help 3 149 Product accessories list 1 35 description 1 1 functional model 2 3 installation 1 7 options list 1 35 software 1 3 Product support contact information xv Programmer guide 2 2 Propagation delay deskew 3 86 Q QAPlus Win application 1 32 Quality Factor measurement B 4 Quantizing Glossary 7 R Range vertical input 3 13 Readout display 2 6 Readouts 2 6 Readouts bar 2 6 Real time sampling Glossary 7 Recalling a setup 3 101 Recalling a waveform 3 108 Record acquisition shared by all channels 3 19 length defined 3 27 Record length Glossary 7 Reference levels methods for setting 3 70 Reference memory Glossary 7 Reference waveforms Glossary 8 how to cle
160. er in the Accessories folder 1 Minimize the UI application by clicking the minimize button in the upper right corner on screen Click Start in the Task bar to pop up the Start menu Select Programs gt Accessories gt System Tools gt Backup in the Start menu Use the backup tool that displays to select your back up media and to select the files and folders that you want to back up Use the Windows 98 online help for information on using the Back Up tool You can back up to the floppy drive or to a networked storage device over the ethernet port rear panel You can restore the UI application to the screen by clicking its button in the Windows Task bar This section describes how to install the software found on the CSA8000 amp TDS8000 OS Rebuild 063 3491 XX and Product Software 063 3492 XX CDs that accompany this product The instrument ships with the product software installed so only perform these procedures if reinstallation becomes necessary There are two sets of CDs that ship with this instrument m OS Rebuild CD 063 3491 XX This 2 disk set contains the operating system for the instrument This CD set which can be used to rebuild the instrument hard drive includes the Window 98 operating system installation If you need to reinstall Windows 98 you may be able to do so without rebuilding the instrument hard drive See Operating System Reinstallation on page 1 16 for more information Product Softw
161. essories Item Part Number m Certificate of Traceable Calibration for product at initial Not Orderable shipment m Business reply card Not Orderable m 1Windows 98 compatible keyboard 119 6297 00 m 1Windows 98 compatible mouse 119 6298 00 m 1 Instrument front cover 200 4519 00 m 1 Accessory pouch 016 1441 00 m 2 Touchscreen styluses 119 6107 00 m 1 ESD wrist strap with 6 foot coiled cord 006 3415 04 m CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Online Help part of application Not Applicable software m CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 071 0433 XX m CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Reference 071 0437 XX m CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Programmer Online Guide part of Not Applicable application software CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 1 35 Accessories and Options Table 1 3 Standard accessories Cont Item m CSA8000 amp TDS8000 OS Rebuild CDs this 2 disk set includes a certificate of authenticity for software and a restore license m CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Product Software CD m Power cord Optional The following accessories are orderable for use with the instrument at the time Part Number 063 3491 XX 063 3492 XX Order by Option Number this manual originally published Consult a current Tektronix catalog for additions changes and details Table 1 4 Optional accessories Item m DL 11 Dual Delay Line m SIU 800 Static Isolation Unit m Sampling Module Extender 1 meter m Sampling Module Extender 2 meter m 3 5 Male to 3 5 Female S
162. ether For more information on how the product documentation relates to the instrument operating interfaces and features see Documentation Map on page 2 2 Conventions Terminology This manual uses the terms vertical acquisition window and horizontal acquisition window throughout this section and elsewhere These terms refer to the vertical and horizontal range of the acquisition window which defines the segment of the input signal that the acquisition system acquires The terms do not refer to any operating system windows that you might display on screen XIV CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Preface Contacting Tektronix Phone Address Web site Sales support Service support Technical support 1 800 833 9200 Tektronix Inc Department or name if known 14200 SW Karl Braun Drive P O Box 500 Beaverton OR 97077 USA www tektronix com 1 800 833 9200 select option 1 1 800 833 9200 select option 2 Email techsupport tektronix com 1 800 833 9200 select option 3 1 503 627 2400 6 00 a m 5 00 p m Pacific time This phone number is toll free in North America After office hours please leave a voice mail message Outside North America contact a Tektronix sales office or distributor see the Tektronix web site for a list of offices CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual XV Preface XVI CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Ae Product Description Models Key Features This chap
163. ets you limit automated measurements to a specified portion of the waveform You define the area of interest using measurement gates General purpose knob The large front panel knob on the upper right corner of the front panel You can use it to change the value of the control or element that currently has focus It can adjust the cursors GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus An interconnection bus and protocol that allows you to connect multiple instruments in a network under the control of a controller Also known as IEEE 488 bus It transfers data with eight parallel data lines five control lines and three handshake lines Graticule A grid on the display screen that creates the horizontal and vertical axes You can use it to visually measure waveform parameters CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Glossary Graticule labels Each graticule displays three labels The upper and lower left labels indicate the amplitude level at each of the upper and lower boundaries of the graticule edges These levels are based on the vertical scale and offset of the selected waveform The lower right label is horizontal scale factor of the selected waveform expressed in units per division High The value used as the 100 level in amplitude measurements such as Peak and Overshoot See Levels Used in Taking Amplitude Timing and Area Measurements on page B 6 for more details HighRef The waveform high reference level used in such measurements
164. ettings for Channel waveforms will be aay p IE adjusted as you use the controls the controls will be inoperable if you have a reference or a math waveform E esse selected E Note that the Mag1 markers enclose a segment of Main RESOLUTION view that appears across the 10 division width of the C9 Mag view See below NCREASE SCALE Portion magnified in the Mag time base view P Main Divider bar dn nr ascen ND S 25 00ns di For more 4 Press the Horizontal Menu front panel button Click information the icon in the the upper right corner of the Horiz Setup dialog box and then click any dialog box control to pop up help on that control See Accessing Online Help on page 3 145 for an overview of the online help system Click the Help button in the Horiz Setup dialog box to access a context sensitive overview on the horizontal controls and their set up End of Procedure Customizing the Display Why Use Use the display customizing features this instrument provides to present the display elements color graticule style waveform representation and so on according to your preferences 3 58 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Displaying Waveforms What s Special Color grading You can select color grading of a waveform so that its data color or intensity reflects the frequency of occurrence of the data Keys to Using The key points that follow describe operating considerations for setting up t
165. evel detailed usage procedures are in the online help system The table that follows lists the sections in this chapter Section Description Page no Acquiring Waveforms Provides an overview of capturing signals and digitizing them into waveforms 3 3 Triggering Provides an overview of the instrument trigger features and their use 3 37 Displaying Waveforms Provides an overview of display operation 3 47 Measuring Waveforms Provides an overview of the the cursors and automatic measurements tools this 3 65 instrument provides and how to use them Creating Math Waveforms Provides an overview of how you can mathematically combine acquired waveforms and 3 89 measurement scalars to create a math waveform that supports your data analysis task Data Inout and Output Provides an overview of the input and output capabilities of your instrument 3 101 Using Masks Histograms Provides an overview of the statistical tools this instrument provides and how to use 3 123 and Waveform Databases them mask testing histograms and waveform databases Accessing Online Help Provides an overview of the help system which is integrated as part of the instrument 3 145 user interface and describes how to access it Cleaning the Instrument Provides instructions on how to clean the exterior of the instrument and its touch screen 3 153 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 1 Overview 3 2 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual i Ae Acquiring Waveforms Befor
166. ex Extinction Ratio measurement B 3 Eye Height measurement B 3 Eye Width measurement B 3 F Fall Time measurement B 5 Fiberchannel standards supported 3 124 Firmware upgrade 1 3 Flat panel display cleaning 3 153 FrameScan Acquisition keys to using 3 30 usage limitations 3 30 FrameScan acquisition advantages 3 29 cycle 3 30 How to catch bit error 3 35 how works illustrated 3 31 overview 3 29 why use 3 29 Envelope usage limitations 3 30 FrameScan Mode How to acquire in 3 32 Frequency measurement B 5 Front panel map 2 7 Functional tests procedure 1 23 G Gain measurement B 1 Gated measurements Glossary 4 General purpose knob Glossary 4 Gigabit Ethernet 3 124 GPIB Glossary 4 Graticule Glossary 4 labels Glossary 5 one per view 3 51 H Hard drive operating system reinstallation 1 17 Hardware and operating system procedure 1 32 High Glossary 5 High frequency triggering 3 42 High measurement B 1 High Low tracking 3 68 methods for 3 69 HighRef measurement level Glossary 5 Histograms continuous operation of 3 135 counting 3 135 editing features 3 134 Index 4 in recalled setups 3 135 size 3 135 supported statistics table of 3 138 taking 3 134 to take 3 136 usage limitations 3 135 valid sources of 3 134 why use 3 134 Holdoff triggering 3 42 usable limits 3 43 Holdoff trigger Glossary
167. expressed as a percentage Measured over the first cycle in the waveform or in the gated region Negative Width Period Timing measurement Time of the first pulse in the waveform or in the gated region Distance time between MidR ef default 50 amplitude points of a negative pulse NegativeDutyCycle x 100 Timing measurement Time it takes for the first complete signal cycle to complete in the waveform or in the gated region The reciprocal of frequency Measured in seconds Timing measurement The amount one waveform leads or lags another in time Expressed in degrees where 360 comprise one waveform cycle Timing measurement The distance between the trigger and the first positive crossing of the MidRef default 5096 amplitude point for a pulse Measured over the first pulse in the waveform or in the gated region Timing measurement Measured using the first cycle in the waveform or in the gated region The ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage PositiveWidth Period UA PositiveDutyCycle Timing measurement Measured over the first pulse in the waveform or in the gated region The distance time between MidRef default 50 amplitude points of a positive pulse Timing measurement Time taken for the leading edge of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region to rise from a Low Ref value default 1096 to a High Ref value default 9096 of its final value CSA
168. f several maps that describe the system its operation and its documen tation Documentation Map on page 2 2 lists the documentation that supports the instrument m System Overview Maps on page 2 4 describe the high level operating blocks and operating cycle of the instrument M User Interface Map on page 2 7 describes the elements of the User Interface UI application which provides complete control of the instrument m Front Panel Map on page 2 8 describes the elements of the instrument front panel and cross references information relevant to each element m Display Maps on page 2 9 describe elements and operation of single graticule and multiple graticule displays m I O Maps on page 2 11 describe input output ports and peripherals Tutorial procedures are available online as part of the online help To display select the Setups Guide from the UI application Help menu For information on configuring and installing your instrument refer to Chapter 1 Getting Started CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 2 1 ee l Documentation Map This instrument ships with documents individually tailored to address different aspects or parts of the product features and interface The table below cross references each document to the instrument features and interfaces it supports To read about Refer to these documents Description Standard accessories or packing list Graphical packing list The graphical packing list
169. fined 3 48 how to customize 3 62 how to set style of 3 61 limit readouts defined 3 48 map Main amp Mag views 2 9 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual map Main view 2 8 mode Infinite Persistence 3 60 Normal 3 60 Variable Persistence 3 60 multiple views 3 49 preview field defined 3 48 printing 3 120 keys to using 3 50 system Glossary 3 time base views defined 3 48 touchscreen defined 3 49 customizing 3 58 waveform 2 6 why use 3 49 zoom 3 49 Display controls purpose 3 49 vs Acquisition controls 3 52 Display menu Dots 3 60 Vectors 3 60 Display screen overview of 3 47 Display settings Horizontal position 3 53 horizontal reference 3 53 Displaying waveforms 3 47 Documentation online 2 1 online help system 3 145 Dots 3 60 Dots Display menu 3 60 Dragging mouse or touchscreen Glossary 3 Duty Cycle Distortion measurement B 3 E Edge trigger Glossary 4 Electrical modules installation 1 8 Electrical sampling modules specifications where to find A 1 Envelope acquisition mode Glossary 4 Environmental requirements installation 1 7 Equivalent time sampling random Glossary 4 Error detection Glossary 4 Error rate Glossary 4 ESD amp sampling modules 3 6 and trigger source inputs 3 41 Exporting waveforms 3 116 Extinction Ratio measurement B 3 Extinction Ratio DB measurement B 3 Index 3 Ind
170. for all measurements If you cannot set the tracking method the controls will be disabled Reference Levels Method You can choose the method that the instrument uses to determine a second group of levels when taking time related measurements These levels are the High Mid and Low references For example the measure ment system takes risetime from the waveform edge segment that transitions from the Low to the High reference levels The instrument provides the following four calculation methods refer to Figure 3 21 as you read about each method 1 2 Relative Reference is calculated as percentage of the High Low range High Delta Reference is calculated as absolute values from the High Level CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Measuring Waveforms 3 Low Delta Reference is calculated as absolute values from the Low Level 4 Absolute Reference is set by absolute values in user units Reference level calculation methods AR SUN ee Y y g o d rcd 7g 4S9 S S A Kd qe S 3 wv JN Lf WM tw Nw CN SH SR i y High Reference 90 10 mV 90 mV 50 150 mV j Mid Reference 0 mV ano Low Reference Bee Low 50 mV I y Figure 3 21 Reference level calculation methods 90 mV The High and Low levels from which the reference levels are calculated in methods 1 3 above are the levels established using the selected High Low tracking me
171. for non linearities of various analog circuits M Trigger System Recognizes a specific event of interest on the input trigger signal and informs the Timebase of the trigger event s occurrence gating the taking of a sample after a controlled incremental delay see page 3 16 The trigger event is defined as time zero for the waveform record which means that all samples are displayed relative to this point There is no internal trigger pick off from the channels rather a trigger signal must be obtained through the external trigger inputs from the system clock or from the clock recovery when available from optical modules equipped with clock recovery Timebase System Tells the Acquisition system to take a sample i e convert from analog to digital at some specific time relative to the trigger or clock event In more general terms synchronizes the capturing of digital samples in the Acquisition system to the trigger events generated from the Trigger system Signal Processing Transformation System Performs a variety of trans formations or operations beginning with the most fundamental data elements in the system the channel waveforms Waveform math operations automatic measurements and histogram generation are examples Display Input Output Storage Systems Provides display control Sets the vertical scale and position of the display which controls how much of the vertical acquisition window appears on screen Provides outp
172. forms See the display maps beginning on page 2 9 for UI alternatives to controlling vertical and horizontal setup The online help system also documents the UI To Set Up the Signal Input Use the procedure that follows when setting up the instrument to scale and position input signals for acquisition WARNING Sampling modules are inherently vulnerable to static damage Always observe static safe procedures and cautions as outlined in your sampling module user manual Overview To set the signal input Related control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 Connect the 2 input signal Select the input 3 signal channel The instrument must be installed with sampling modules p in place The acquisition system should be set to run continuously L Also an appropriate trigger signal must be routed to the See the sampling module user manuals for instrument and triggering must be set up sampling module installation See page 3 23 for acquisition setup and page 3 45 for trigger setup in this manual Connect to the signal to be acquired using proper 2O NU probing connecting techniques See the user manual for o mee CS ree the sampling module you have chosen m Cis a Note For more details on controlling vertical setup push the Vertical MENU button to display the Vertical Nest Setup dialog box and then click its HELP button Push
173. g from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment c to repair any damage or malfunction caused by the use of non Tektronix supplies or consumables d to repair a product that has been modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product or e to repair damage or malfunction resulting from failure to perform user maintenance and cleaning at the frequency and as prescribed in the user manual if applicable THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TEKTRONIX RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Table of Contents General Safety Summary cece cc ccc cece cece ccc nnn Prole 660 34 0565206665050 40 5555s bere oeGe see tew sees eee About oA CURRERE TINTE TTE TTE Related Manuals and Online Documents eee COBDVEBPIOR SS uoa aoo i od eripe De PEOR oe a eee du Ce ee I RON RE RUE UR Co ontac ng Tekom ous 90971
174. h as commas or tabs separate each field riginal data type Choose the file type that best describes your data C Fixed width Fields are aligned in columns with spaces between each Field 1 H File Origin windows ANSI Start import at row Text Import Wizard Step 2 of 3 This screen lets you set the delimiters your data contains You can see how your text is affected in the preview below Delimiters Tabi Semicolon IV Comma Space Other E N Treat consecutive delimiters as one Text Qualifier 7 Text Import Wizard Step 3 of 3 This screen lets you select each column and set the Data Format rColumn data Format General General converts numeric values to numbers date C Yext values to dates and all remaining values to text 9 vov C Do not import column Skip File Edit Wiew Insert Format Tools Data Window Help Cael Lae a a wx FA ELM 9 A 100 B B Prompt Arial X B z u Ee Be s x g8 S E H D A 7 90243072 Select the entire row Access the Chart Wizard CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Data Input and Output Overview To use exported waveforms Cont Control elements amp resources Specify a 7 From the Chart Wizard make sure Built In is checked ENFETTEPEEETERTEEE ress line graph Then select the either Lines in the Standards Types Standard Types custom Types char
175. h the Acquisition CLEAR DATA button to discard the acquired data in all channels For more information on the controls described in this procedure push the Acquisition MENU button Click the HELP button in the setup dialog box that displays Also see references listed at right End of Procedure Acquisition Control Background See sampling module user manuals for sampling module installation See page 3 23 for acquisition setup and page 3 45 for trigger setup in this manual RUN STOP RUN CLEAR DATA See To Set Up Acquisition Modes on page 3 23 This section contains background information on the data sampling and acquisition process that can help you more effectively setup the acquisition window of each channel This section BM describes the acquisition hardware CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 25 Acquiring Waveforms 3 26 Acquisition Hardware Sampling Process m defines the sampling process sampling modes and the waveform record BM describes the acquisition cycle in Normal and FrameScan modes Before a signal can be acquired it must pass through the input channel where it is sampled and digitized Each channel has a dedicated sampler and digitizer as shown in Figure 3 7 each channel can produce a stream of digital data from which waveform records can be extracted See Signal Connection and Scaling on page 3 4 for further description of scaling positioning and DC offsetting of ch
176. hannel sources thereby modifying any math waveforms using them For example with the acquisition mode set to Envelope a C1 C2 math waveform will receive enveloped channel 1 and channel 2 data and therefore will also be an envelope waveform M Clearing the data in a waveform source causes a baseline zero volt level to be delivered to any math waveform that includes that source until the source receives new data Time Base Dependencies Selections for math waveform sources operands consist of channel and reference waveforms that are acquired or defined and viewed in the main time base The math waveforms derive their time base and record lengths from waveform sources You cannot change them directly you can only change them indirectly by changing the time base for the source In case of sources having different record lengths the math waveform created matches the shorter waveform and the additional trailing data from the longer waveform is not used Expression Syntax You build math waveforms using the Define Math Waveform dialog box To help you create valid math waveforms this dialog box blocks illegal entries by disabling any dialog box element that would create an invalid entry in the math waveform expression The syntax that follows describes valid math expressions which can be quite complex in excess of 100 characters long Expression lt UnaryExpression gt lt BinaryExpression gt lt UnaryExpression gt
177. he the display system so that it presents waveforms and other display elements as you prefer Display Settings Table 3 5 lists display attributes that you can set and where they are accessed Table 3 5 Customizable display attributes Display attribute Access Options Menu name Entry I Graticule Style Choose from Full Grid Cross hair and Frame styles Dearie Utility Choose from Normal Infinite Persistence and Variable pay Display Persistence Modes Show Vectors Utility Choose No to display each waveform as a series of dots normal display mode only Display Choose Yes to display vectors or lines between the dots Waveform Label Enter a new label for the waveform you have selected Utilities Waveform P rop s Utility Waveform P rop s Waveform Color Cursor Colors Choose from six different colors for each waveform choose from Graticule Colors Display 16 different colors for a cursor graticule histogram or mask Mask Color Mask Test Waveform Color Shortcut Color Grading Choose to display a waveform with its data color graded based on Grading its frequency of occurrence See Color grade a waveform on page 3 63 Virtual Keyboard Utility Choose from alphabetic or QWERTY styles Except for Shortcut the Menu Names refer to the menus found in the Menu bar at the top of the instrument screen The shortcut menu for a waveform can be displayed by right clicking on a displayed waveform or on its icon which
178. he eye crossing point as a percentage of eye height Crossing 100 PCrosstmean PBaS mean PTODmean PBaS nean Eye pattern optical measurement The peak to peak time variation of the 1st eye crossing measured at the MidRef as a percent of the eye period DCD sec 100 x TDCDp_p TCrossanean TCross2mean Eye pattern optical measurement Ratio of eye top to base Ext Ratio Pl0Pmean PBase nean Note Optical sampling modules may subtract the dark current voltage from the PTOPmean and PBaSemean values Check the documentation for your sampling module Eye pattern optical measurement Ratio of eye base to top in 96 Ext Ratio 26 100 PBas nean P Topmean Note Optical sampling modules may subtract the dark current voltage from the PTOPmean and PBaSemean values Check the documentation for your sampling module Eye pattern optical measurement Ratio of eye top to base in db Note Optical sampling modules may subtract the dark current voltage from the PTOPmean and PBaSemean values Check the documentation for your sampling module Eye pattern optical measurement The eye height in watts or volts Eye Height PTOPmean 3 PTOpsigma PBaSemean 3 PBasecigma Eye pattern optical measurement The eye width in seconds Eye Width TCross2nean 3 TCrOSSZsigma TCTOSS tmean 3 TCrOSS Isigma Eye pattern optical measurement The RMS value of the edge jitter in the current horizontal units 1 Jitter RMS
179. he instrument to automatically detect mask violations in communications and other waveforms m Taking Histograms on page 3 134 describes how to take histograms to view the horizontal or vertical distribution of data on your waveforms m Using Waveform Databases on page 3 139 describes how to accumulate a waveform into the database and use the waveform database to view the waveform data weighted with respect to how frequently it reoccurs in the database Mask Testing Waveforms Why Use What s Special This section overviews the instrument features related to mask testing including how to create edit delete and activate masks You can select a standard mask edit a mask or create an new mask from scratch Use mask testing to test your waveforms for time or amplitude violations Mask testing will count waveform samples called hits or violations that occur within a specific area the mask Use the communications standard masks that this instrument provides SONET SDH Fiber Channel Optical and Electrical Gigbit Ethernet to test your signals or define your own masks Some mask testing features of note follow Flexible Mask Editing You can use the controls in Mask Setup dialog box to completely specify custom masks or edit existing masks selecting adding delet ing and placing a vertices in user defined waveform source units For quick edits you can use can use the mouse or touchscreen to drag to resize and repos
180. iew waveform top graticule are a full screen width apart 10 divisions See Figure 1 14 on page the 1 31 M One period of the internal clock signal a square wave in the Mag view bottom graticule is about five horizontal divisions on screen Matches the waveform in the top graticule See Figure 1 14 m Rotating the Horizontal SCALE knob clockwise to 500 ns div expands the waveform in the bottom graticule to double the period about 10 horizontal divisions per waveform period and returning the Horizontal SCALE knob to 1 ps div returns the period to about five divisions Leave the Horizontal Scale set to 1 us div Left Mag time base Right Mag time base marker marker File Edit View Setup Utilities Help Triggered Wavelerms Tektronix 7 X 3 p Acq co Imm Clock a A Jh ov E ails N 2 Eas Waveform C3 20 00m Widi Main time base view Mag time base view Ics a 20 00mv SET T man T xi Any sedi ipu A 12 57 PM 3 22 00 Figure 1 14 Mag time base verification 8 Verify that the Mag2 time base operates a Push the Mag button to remove the display of the Magl time base b Perform steps 6 and 7 but use the Mag2 button instead of the Magl End of Functional Test Procedures CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 1 31 Incoming Inspection Perform the Hardware and Operating System Tests QAPlus WIN A 1 32 These procedures verify the instrument hardware functions A diagnostics
181. igger system is triggered READY and TRIG D are always off if acquisition is stopped Other trigger 7 Ifyou need to change the trigger mode or other settings Trigger Menu button parameters push the Trigger MENU button to display the Trig Setup dialog box From there you can ACQUISITION an m Switch between Auto and Normal trigger modes HORIZONTAL em TRYGGER me MENU MENU m fyou have trouble triggering you can adjust holdoff which may help For assistance with this 4 POSITION D LEVEL control see step 8 You may on occasion want to turn off metastable rejection again see step 8 for more information RESOLUTION READY e TRIG D SET INCREASE DETAIL O 30 For more 8 Press the Help button in the Trig Setup dialog box to information access the online assistance specific to triggering commands You can also read about key trigger features in Keys to Using on page 3 37 See page 3 145 for information on online help End of Procedure 3 46 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual o Displaying Waveforms To make use of the waveforms you acquire you will often want to display them This instrument includes a flexible customizable display that you can control to examine and analyze acquired waveforms This section presents an overview of display operation in the topics Using the Waveform Display and Customizing the Display Acquisition Output and User Interface system storage and display
182. ilename Select a Stop After action from the drop down list box Choose from the following actions Ring Bell None Print Screen to File Print Screen to Printer Save all Waveforms Enter a filename for saving to if you ve selected Print to File or Save all Waveforms Click to check Ring Bell if you want audio notice when acquisition stops Start acquisition 8 Push the RUN STOP front panel button to begin Im acquiring Z See To Start and Stop Acquisition on page 3 25 End of Procedure 3 24 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Acquiring Waveforms To Start and Stop Acquisition Use the procedure that follows to start and stop acquisition Overview To start and stop acquisition Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 To start acquiring To stop acquiring To clear an acquisition For more information Instrument must be installed with sampling modules in place before powering on the instrument Instrument must be powered up with horizontal and vertical controls set up Triggering should also be set up Make sure all the channels to be acquired are turned on use the channel buttons see page 3 8 if needed Then push the RUN STOP button to begin acquiring Push the RUN STOP button to stop acquisition Acquisition will also stop when acquisition finishes if a selected stop condition is satisfied see step 4 on page 3 24 or if triggering ceases while in Normal trigger mode Pus
183. ing Start a COM Ports b LPT Ports c System Board d System Info e USB f Video CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 1 33 Incoming Inspection SEI QA Win3 Fille View Diagnostics Report Tools Help O Ov Qe Gt Qe sl 2 I i EI s aj Pee Follow any instructions appearing on the screen 7 Check test results in scrollable results listing in the lower left corner of the QAPlus test window All tests should pass 8 Close the QAPlus Win diagnostics by selecting Exit in the File menu 9 You can restore the product software application to the screen by clicking the TDS CSA8000 icon in the Windows Task bar End of Procedure 1 34 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual BEEN ee Accessories and Options This section lists the standard and optional accessories available for the instrument as well as the product options Accessories Standard Table 1 3 lists the standard accessories that ship with the instrument NOTE Table 1 3 lists the standard accessories that ship with the instrument not those shipped with any electrical or optical sampling modules ordered Each sampling module ships individually in their own package Consult the User manual found in the shipping package for any module you ordered m 80E01 80E02 80E03 amp 80E04 Electrical Sampling Module User Part no 071 0434 XX Manual m 80C00 Optical Sampling Module User Manual Part no 071 0435 XX Table 1 3 Standard acc
184. iring Waveforms NOTE Amplitude related automatic measurements for example peak to peak and RMS will be accurate for vertical windows like those shown in Figure 3 2 a and b on page 3 14 because neither waveform is clipped that is both waveforms are acquired But if the signal amplitude were to extend outside the vertical acquisition window the data acquired becomes clipped Clipped data causes inaccurate results if used in amplitude related automatic measure ments Clipping also causes inaccurate amplitude values in waveforms that are stored or exported for use in other programs M The vertical position adjusts the display of the graticule relative to the vertical acquisition window position is a display control Figure 3 2 b shows how vertical position moves the waveform graticule vertically in the vertical acquisition window to place the acquired waveform in the graticule display Position does not determine what data is acquired as does vertical offset The vertical offset control affects the vertical acquisition window and the displayed waveform as follows M The vertical range window is always centered around the offset value that is set Vertical offset is the voltage level at middle of the vertical acquisition window With no zero offset see Figure 3 3 that voltage level is zero ground m As you vary vertical offset the middle voltage level moves relative to zero This moves the vertical acquisition window up
185. is displayed in the waveform bar left of the graticule CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 59 Displaying Waveforms 3 60 Normal and Persistence Displays Use display persistence to control how waveform data ages Normal style displays waveforms without persistence each new waveform record replaces the previously acquired record for a channel You can choose to display normal waveforms as vectors which displays lines between the record points or dots vectors off which displays the record points only You can also choose an interpolation mode See Interpolation below Variable Persistence style accumulates the waveform record points on screen and displays them for a specific time interval The oldest waveform data continuously fades from the display as new waveform records acquire Infinite Persistence style accumulates the data record points until you change some control such as scale factor or explicitly clear the data causing the display to be erased Waveform data builds up as new data records acquire Persistence style applies to all waveforms except for channel waveforms and reference waveforms displayed with color or intensity grading Interpolation For record lengths of less than 500 points you can choose to have the instrument interpolate between the sampled points it acquires Interpolation affects the display only mask testing histograms and automatic measurement results are based on acquired not interpolat
186. is the first thing you should see when you open the instrument box It shows all items as they are packaged in the box Additionally all standard accessories are listed on page 1 35 of this manual Installation Specification amp Operation Main User Manual Read the Reference for a quick overview of overviews Quick Reference Manual instrument features and their usage CD booklets Read the User Manual for general information about your instrument procedures on how to put it into service specifications of its perfor mance maps of its user interface controls overviews and background on its features quu 0 9 92 0 000 000000009 00 000 Specific installation information for both the operating system OS and product software is located in each of the CD booklets accompany ing the CDs For more detailed usage information see Online Help System below All about the Sampling Modules Electrical Optical or Other Read these manuals for complete information C Sampling Module User Manual about the sampling modules you purchased S OGO how to install them in the instrument how to use them and how to protect them from ESD Depending on the modules ordered one or more of these manuals ship with this product gt fy PE m Insert these manuals in back of the manual that you are reading now
187. it the selected waveform If the waveform was not displayed operation is as follows m fthe waveform you select is defined it displays otherwise the Define Math dialog box displays so that you can define and turn on the waveform you just selected See To Define a Math Waveform on page 3 93 for a procedure for doing so Tip You can also click the math waveform in the display or its icon atthe left of the display to select it Set scale and 4 Use the Vertical Scale and Position knobs to size and UE DIA position position the waveform on the screen Tip You can t adjust the offset of a math waveform However adjustments of offset settings in the source waveforms will reflect in the math waveform as po determined by its expression Y Tip You can t adjust horizontal scale position and sample density resolution of math waveforms If adjusting these settings affect sources for a math waveform the adjustment will be reflected in the math AE waveform G CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 97 Creating Math Waveforms Overview To use math waveforms Cont Related control elements amp resources Take automatic Press the Vertical MATH button and use the VERTICAL measurements numbered front panel button to choose a math waveform from M1 M8 See right 1 Select one of the measurement tool bars File Edit View Setup Utilities Help Triggered 0 Histogram Waveforms al
188. ith a pattern length that is a multiple of eight m Signals connected to the DIRECT connector are fed directly to the trigger circuitry The signal is DC coupled and can be up to 3 0 GHz When using a given trigger source you should disconnect any other trigger source from the front panel to ensure specified performance Specifically M Do not connect a signal to the Trigger Direct or Trigger Prescale front panel connector unless you ve selected that input as the trigger source M Do not connect a signal to the External 10 MHz Reference front panel connector unless you have selected that input as the timebase mode in the Horizontal setup dialog box Probe to Trigger Source Connection You can connect probes such as the P6207 and P6200 to the Trigger DIRECT input connector of the instrument Observe CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 41 Triggering 3 42 all static precautions outlined in the documentation for the probe you choose while following these steps Connect the probe power connector to the TEKPROBE and SMA compat ible probe Level 1 or 2 only M Connect the probe signal connector probe must have an SMA connector to the Trigger DIRECT source input not the PRESCALE source input M Connect the probe input to the signal that is to supply the trigger source The probe you attach preconditions the trigger signal for its input just as other probes do for the vertical inputs More specifically a probe attached
189. ith low counts Use the Top Bottom Left and Right boxes to set the size and location of the histogram box The histogram box selects the section of the waveform used for histograms Select Absolute to use units based on the source waveform Select to display the histogram box as a percentage of the graticule This display setting considers the top left corner of the graticule to be 0 0 and the bottom right corner to be 100 100 Tip It is quicker to use the mouse or touchscreen to drag to size the histogram box on screen then fine tune the values if needed with the Limit Controls End of Procedure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual To take a histogram Cont Related control elements amp resources Display Options v Histogram Linear C Logarithmic Color NNI Size li aH Limit Controls Top E r Urs AH Left Right B5 33ns 16 66rns Battom E BL Onn AH Absolute NE 3 137 Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases 3 138 Histogram Statistics After you check Enable Histogram in the Histogram Setup dialog box histogram Statistics appear on the right hand side of the screen The following table is a list of the available histogram statistics and a brief description of each Table 3 10 Histogram statistics Name Mean Median Standard Deviation P eak to P eak P k P k Mean 1 StdDev u lo Mean 2 StdDev u 20 Mean 3 StdDe
190. ition the masks directly on the screen CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 123 Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases 3 124 What s Excluded Keys to Using Mask Specific Autoset You can set Autoset to either Auto or Manual in the Mask Setup dialog box When set to Auto the instrument automatically performs a standard mask specific autoset whenever you select a standard mask GPIB editing You can not edit masks through the programmable interface GPIB You can however still create and or delete entire masks through this interface Concurrent Mask Tests Only one mask standard or user defined set is active at any time If you have a mask selected enabled and then select a new mask the new mask replaces the previous mask You cannot test to multiple standards simultaneously The key points that describe operating considerations for using and editing masks follow Mask Standards and Masks A mask standard contains one or more masks that when applied against the waveforms for which they are intended test the waveform for violations of an industry standard The supported standards are listed in Table 3 9 Masks are numbered polygons that define an area within a mask standard or within a user mask in which to count waveform samples as hits Table 3 9 Standard masks SONET SDH Fiber channel Other OC1 STMO FC133 Optical 132 8 Mb s Gigabit Ethernet 51 84 Mb s OC3 STM1 155 52 Mb s FC266 Optical 265 6 Mb s
191. ive slewing edge High Frequency ON mode Removes trigger hysteresis and improves sensitivity Should be used when trigger slew rate exceeds 1 V ns High Frequency OFF mode Retains trigger hysteresis and improves noise rejection atlow slew rates Metastability R eject On mode Upon detection of trigger and holdoff collision time base will reject the sampled point Metastability Reject Off mode Allows metastable points caused by trigger holdoff collisions to display Adjustable 5 us to 50 ms in 0 5 ns increments When External Prescaled Trigger mode is used holdoff period applies to the P rescaled input divided by 8 A 3 Appendix A Specifications A 4 Table A 3 System Trigger Cont Description External direct trigger capabilities and conditions External direct trigger input characteristics1 External direct trigger input range External direct trigger maximum operating trigger signal External direct trigger level range External direct trigger sensitivity External direct trigger sensitivity External direct trigger level resolution External direct trigger level accuracy External direct trigger delay jitter Short term optimized mode External direct trigger delay jitter short term optimized mode typi cal External direct delay jitter locked to internal 10 MHz refer ence mode External direct delay jitter locked to inter nal 10 MHz reference mode typica
192. ize x Horizontal Scale sec div 2 Time Duration seconds Sample Interval seconds sample x Record Length samples where Time Duration is the horizontal acquisition window time duration 3 Sample Interval sec sample Resolution sec sample I Sample Rate samples sec In 2 above note that it is Sample Interval that varies indirectly to accommodate the window time duration and its scale setting and the Record Length setting as these later two elements can be set by you These elements behave as follows m If Record Length or Time Duration vary Sample Interval varies to accom modate up to highest sample rate lowest sample interval highest resolution If you set faster Horizontal Scale settings decreasing Time Duration and the Sample Interval reaches its lower limit the horizontal scale becomes limited to a setting compatible with the record length and the lower limit of the sample interval If you attempt to set longer Record Lengths and the Sample Interval reaches it lower limit Time Duration remains constant and the record length becomes limited The equation becomes Maximum Record Length Time Duration Min Sample Interval For example at 1ps div and 10 divisions the record length must be no more than 1000 points Max Rec Length 1000 samples 10 divs x Ips div 0 01 ps sample Max Rec Length 1000 samples NOTE Resolution and the equivalent elements sample interval and sample rate see equ
193. king cursor measurements Why Use Use math waveform operation such as those listed above to enhance the displaying processing and analyzing of math waveforms For example in addition to the operations listed you can save math waveforms as references and make them the source of either of two onboard waveform data bases What s Excluded Some operations allowed on channel waveforms are not allowed on math waveforms Independent horizontal scaling Each math waveform that you create derives its horizontal scale and position from the sources you include in its math expression Horizontal controls will not operate with math waveforms You can adjust these controls for the source waveforms and your adjustments will reflect in the math waveform as the sources update You can also magnify math waveforms using the Magl or Mag2 derived time bases CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 95 Creating Math Waveforms Independent vertical offset You cannot adjust the offset for a math wave form you can adjust the offset of channel waveforms used as sources to a math waveform M Explicit gating of waveforms The entire math waveform is used as input to the automatic measurement system Keys to Using Basically you use the same techniques to work with math waveforms that work with channel waveforms The key points that follow describe operating considerations to take into account when using math waveforms Source Considerations In gene
194. l External direct trigger minimum pulse width Characteristics Direct edge triggering on signal applied to dedicated front panel connector with Holdoff Level Adjust Auto Normal High Frequency On Off and Enhanced Triggering On Off controls External direct trigger specifications apply only under the condition that no other trigger signal is applied to respective connectors 5 hort term optimized mode and locked to internal 10 MHz reference specifications only apply under the condition that there is no external 10 MHz reference applied to the front panel connector 50 Q input resistance DC coupled only 1 5 V DC peak AC maximum input voltage 1 Vpp Adjustable between 1 0 V 100 mV DC 3 GHz 50 mV typical DC 4 GHz 1 mV 50 mV 0 10 x level 1 5 ps RMS 10 ppm of horizontal position or better 1 0 ps RMS 5 ppm of horizontal position typical 2 5 ps RMS 0 10 ppm of horizontal position or better 1 6 ps RMS 0 05 ppm of horizontal position typical 167 ps typical CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 3 System Trigger Cont Description Characteristics External directtrigger Metastability Reject on Zero typical metastability External directtrigger Tekprobe SMA Levels 1 and 2 Hotswitching is permitted on this real real time accessory time accessory interface interface External prescaled Prescaled triggering on signal applied to dedicated front panel t
195. l 3 107 Data Input and Output Saving and Recalling Waveforms This instrument can save any number of waveforms limited only by the space you have to store them Why Use By saving a waveform you can recall it at a later time for comparison evalua y g y p tion and documentation This capability is helpful when you want to M recall a waveform for further evaluation or comparison with other wave forms m extend the waveform carrying capacity of the instrument The instrument supports eight reference eight channel and eight math waveforms If you want more than eight references you can save the additional reference to disk for recall later What s Special Some features of note follow Commenting The Save Waveform dialog box and the Recall Waveform dialog box contain a comments field for including and reading comments with your saved waveforms That way you can store information readable upon recall describing each waveform that you save Virtual Keyboarding If you do not have a keyboard connected you can still enter comments and name waveform files The Save and Recall Setup Waveform dialog boxes include the Virtual Keyboard button shown left When you touch or click it the instrument displays a virtual keyboard on screen that you can use with your mouse or the touch screen to enter the waveform path name file name and comment What s Excluded You cannot recall into a channel or a math waveform The instrument r
196. l MENU front panel button again to dismiss the Vert Setup dialog box S Select the channel to test Push the channel button for the channel you want to test The button lights and the channel display comes on See Figure 1 8 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Incoming Inspection VERTICAL Channel buttons N ol 69 N 3 x C i qb q o o Ci C m o Figure 1 8 Channel button location 6 Verify that the channel is operational Confirm that the following statements are true M The vertical scale readout for the channel under test shows a setting of 100 mV and a DC level is at about 2 divisions above center screen M The front panel vertical POSITION knob for the channel you are testing moves the DC level up and down the screen when rotated Return the DC level to 2 divisions above center screen before continuing m Turning the vertical SCALE knob to 50 mV changes the amplitude of the DC level to about 4 divisions above center screen and returning the knob to 100 mV returns the amplitude to about 2 divisions 7 Verify that the channel acquires in all acquisition modes Push the front panel button Acquisition MENU to display the Acq Setup dialog box Click each of the three acquisition modes and confirm that the following statements are true m Sample mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen Note that there is a small amount of noise present on the DC level m Average mode displ
197. l transmission system BER is defined as BER Number of Errors Total Number of Bits BER is usually expressed as a negative exponent For example a BER of 1077 means that 1 bit out of 10 bits is in error BER floor A limiting of the bit error ratio in a digital system as a function of received power due to the presence of signal degradation mechanisms or noise Bit error An incorrect bit Also known as a coding violation Channel An input that connects a signal or attaches a network or transmission line to sampling modules for acquisition of channel waveforms by the instrument Channel Probe deskew A relative time delay that is settable for a channel Setting deskew lets you align signals to compensate for signals that may come in from cables of differing length Channel icon The indicator on the left side of the display that points to the position around which the waveform contracts or expands when vertical scale is changed This position is ground when offset is set to 0 V otherwise it is ground plus offset Channel number The number assigned to a specific signal input channel of an installed CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Glossary sampling module Assignment of channel numbers is described in Maximum Configuration on page 1 10 Channel waveforms Waveforms resulting from signals input into sampling module channels and digitized and acquired by the instrument See Live Waveforms Control knob see Knob C
198. lay LL wo ee Ch4 record Figure 3 5 Common trigger record length and acquisition rate for all channels Setting Acquisition Controls This section overviews the instrument acquisition features those that start and stop acquisitions and those that control how the instrument processes the data as it is acquired just sampled or averaged or enveloped Special features keys to using and operation controls are covered CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 19 Acquiring Waveforms 3 20 Why Use What s Special What s Excluded Keys to Using Vertical Acquisition Offset Mode Horizontal Horizontal Record Scale Position Length Use the acquisition controls to optimize and tailor the acquisition of your waveforms The mode controls described here operate on the data as the instrument acquires it perhaps to reduce noise in the waveform record or to capture a record of min max values for each data point in the waveform record The acquisition controls also let you start and stop acquisition as well as take certain actions after acquisition stops such as to print the acquired waveform Stop After Options You can set the condition upon which acquisition stops such as after a number of acquisitions or a number of mask hits you specify You can set the instrument to save waveforms or print the screen to a file or printer FrameScan Acquisition You can alter the normal acquisition cycle to produce
199. le Persistence to make data persist for a Access to virtual keyboard specified time New waveform displays accumulate data as new waveform records acquire but with continuous replacement of the oldest data If you select Variable P ersistence set a time at which the oldest data is removed Continue with 7 For more ways to customize the display see the next ima the next procedure procedure L See To Customize Graticule and Waveforms on page 3 62 End of Procedure To Customize the Use the procedure that follows to become familiar with the display adjustments Graticule and Waveforms you can make Overview Customizations you can make Related control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 Display the waveforms to be measured on screen The waveform may be a channel reference or math waveform Ifthe source to be measured is in the Mag1 or Mag2 See page 3 23 for acquisition setup and page view turn that view on 3 45 for trigger setup 3 62 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Displaying Waveforms Overview Customizations you can make Cont Related control elements and resources Change wave 3 Right click on the waveform or its icon See right Waveform Icon form color or label Choose Properties from the menu that pops up Type a new name in the Waveform Label box The instrument will use the new label to mark the selected Copy waveform in the graticule area Send Ta Back v Show C
200. lecom components transceiver subassemblies and transmission systems The instrument includes a user interface that runs on the Microsoft Windows 98 operating system as a windowed application You operate the instrument using CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 1 1 Product Description front panel controls with the mouse and keyboard or with the touch screen Key features include industry leading waveform acquisition rate with Sample Envelope and Average acquisition modes support for up to six sampling modules for a maximum configuration of ten inputs Up to eight inputs can be active at a time See Maximum Configura tion on page 1 10 full programmability with an extensive GPIB command set and a message based interface true differential TDR with fast step 35 psec reflected risetime when used with a TDR capable sampling module negligible long term jitter degradation lt 0 1 ppm which substantially improves the ability to view signals that are far delayed from the trigger point without distortion industry leading trigger bandwidth 12 GHz when using the built in pres caler support of both telecom SONET and SDH and datacom Fibre Channel and Gigabit Ethernet optical communication standards powerful built in measurement capability including histograms mask testing and automatic measurements Automatic measurements include eye communications measurements such as Q factor extinction ratio and op
201. lel port IEEE 1284 Serial port CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Characteristics Two 15 pin D subminature connectors on the rear panel Useable to connect external monitors that provide a duplicate of the primary display and or a second monitor on which to view other applications Support at least the basic requirements of the P C99 specification 25 pin D subminature connector on the rear panel Supports the following modes Standard mode output only Bi directional PS 2 compatible Bi directional Enhanced Parallel Port IEEE 1284 standard Mode 1 or Mode 2 v1 7 Bi directional high speed Extended Capabilities Port ECP 9 pin D subminature serial port connector using NS16C550 compatible UARTs supporting transfer speeds up to 115 2 kbits sec A 7 Appendix A Specifications A 8 Table A 7 CSA8000 and TDS8000 Ports Cont Specifications PS 2 Keyboard and Mouse Interface LAN interface External audio con nectors USB interface GPIB interface Internal clock trigger out DC calibration output External 10 MHz reference input Characteristics PS 2 compatible keyboard and mouse connectors RJ 45 LAN connector supporting 10 base T and 100 base T External audio jacks for MIC IN and LINE OUT One USB connector the second USB is disabled because of internal use Complies with IEEE 488 2 Square wave out from 50 Q back termination synchronized to the TDR internal clock drive signal R
202. lements and resources Set the horizon 6 Push the View Main button to make sure the Main time ACQUISITION e tal display base view is selected Use the Horizontal knobs to scale parameters and position the waveform on screen and to set sample ener eee resolution Scaled Horizontally Positioned Horizontally i O OJ GSEs 50 SCALE D The Resolution knob sets the record length See 3 discussion on page 3 17 J Push the Set to 50 button if required to stabilize display Adjust the 7 To adjustthe point around which the waveforms Horizontal reference Horizontal expand and contract click the Horizontal reference Reference and drag it left or right on screen Move the Horizontal reference along the horizontal axis until it aligns to the point on the waveform you want to be stationary on screen Release the Horizontal reference and then adjust the Horizontal Scale knob File Edit View Setup Utilities Help Triggered Tektronix al xi Quick adjust 9 To quickly rescale a portion of a channel waveform so aR ee Em EET ri sp the time base it expands to fill the 10 divisions on screen Click on enne s nar e sla Zoom screen and drag a box around the portion of the d EE waveform you want to zoom i 00 Ic 4 000v pl ov aH main amp 4 500 0ns sid gr 251s 11 59 AM 3 1
203. lete Verify that Pass appears as Status for the main instrument and for all sampling modules listed in the Compensation dialog box when compensation completes b If instead Fail appears as Status rerun the compensation If Fail status continues after rerunning compensation and you have allowed warm up to occur the module or main instrument may need service CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Incoming Inspection c If you want to save the compensation constants generated by this compensation click the Save option button under Select Action Click the Execute button to save the compensation End of Procedure Perform the Functional Tests These procedures use the DC CALIBRATION OUTPUT and the INTERNAL CLOCK OUTPUT connectors to further verify that the instrument functions properly An SMA cable and a 10x attenuator are required to do these test procedures The purpose of these procedures is to confirm that the instrument functions properly The equipment required is intentionally kept to a minimum STOP These procedures verify functions that is they verify that the instrument features operate They do not verify that they operate within limits therefore do not interpret any quantities cited such as about five horizontal divisions as limits STOP DO NOT make changes to the front panel settings that are not called out in the procedures Each verification procedure will require you to set the instrument to default settings
204. logs Press the Select button to switch among fields P ress the Fine button to toggle between normal and fine adjustment Press to start and stop acquisition or clear all channel waveforms atonce Page 3 25 Press a Menu button to quickly access the setup dialog for its control group for more detailed set up Press to display measurement cursors and set the knob and Fine adjust and Select buttons to control them Page 3 81 Press to quickly return to instrument default control settings Page 3 12 Press to automatically set up the instrument controls based on selected channels Page 3 11 Press to access print dialog for printing the display Page 3 120 Press to display the cluster of Setup Dialogs Te PRINT AUTOSET VERTICAL n FINE SELECT ACQUYSITION m cy HORIZONTAL TR c R wens MENU Menu LEVEL for comprehensive set up of the instrument Press to toggle the touch screen on and off Use the Fe cursors touch screen to control UI when you haven t installed a mouse Page 3 53 Select a waveform type Channel wg mer Reference or Math to display or adjust on screen selected button lights Page 3 55 Press to display and select a waveform not yet displayed gt press to select among displayed waveforms press again to turn a selected waveform off Button lights indicate displayed and selected waveforms Page 3
205. lue The instrument will retain and change to the requested value if the user changes control settings such that the requested value exceeds the minimum usable holdoff Actual values can range from 5 us 55 ms CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Triggering To Trigger Use the procedure that follows when setting up the instrument to trigger acquisitions Overview To trigger Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must be installed with sampling modules 4 in place Acquisition system should be set to Run and the vertical and horizontal controls should be set appropriately for the signal to be acquired See Sampling Module User Manuals for sampling module installation See page 3 23 of this manual for acquisition Setup Apply a trigger 2 Connect the signal to be triggered on using proper PRESCALE signal probing connecting techniques for your application TRIGGER INPUT Typical approaches include using 2 5V P P MAX m External Trigger Direct or Prescale Portion of the input signal coupled to the appropriate input see right using a power divider on input signal TRIGGER DIRECT INPUT Internal Clock No external trigger required DC 3 0 GHz 1 5V MAX Clock Recovery Recovered clock signal obtained from those optical sampling modules supporting clock recovery connection internal through the sampling module no external trigger connection required Note When using any of the ab
206. mance of an incoming inspection is not required to put the instrument in service These instructions verify that the instrument is operating correctly after shipment but do not check product specifications An incoming inspection includes the following parts M Perform the Diagnostics on page 1 20 runs the internal diagnostics Perform a Compensation on page 1 21 runs the self compensation routine M Perform the Functional Tests on page 1 23 uses the DC CALIBRATION OUTPUT and the INTERNAL CLOCK OUTPUT connectors to verify that the instrument is functioning M Perform the Hardware and Operating System Tests on page 1 32 uses a software program called QAPlus Win to verify instrument hardware and the Windows 98 operating system is functioning If the instrument fails any test within this section it may need service To contact Tektronix for service see Contacting Tektronix on page xv of Preface Make sure you have put the instrument into service as detailed in Installation starting on page 1 7 Then assemble the following test equipment and precede with the procedures that follow Assemble Equipment To complete the incoming inspections procedures requires the following test equipment m 1 One SMA cable such as Tektronix part number 174 1427 00 m One SMA 10X attenuator such as Tektronix part number 015 1003 00 m 80E00 series electrical sampling module installed as outlined in its User manual m 1 80C00 series o
207. mask if possible Autoset adjusts the vertical scale and offset horizontal scale position and reference parameters as required for the mask standard You may want to revert to the factory default setup if so use the following procedure to reset the instrument Overview To reset to factory defaults Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument is powered on and running Execute 2 Push the Default Setup button Signal Conditioning Background A 3 12 See Power On Instrument on page 1 12 DEFAULT SETUP End of Procedure This section contains background information that can help you more effectively set up the acquisition window of each channel Input This instrument samples sequentially in order to provide superior bandwidth and time resolution Sequential sampling systems sample the input without scaling it they have a fixed dynamic range therefore input protection and dynamic range are necessarily limited CAUTION Do not overdrive the inputs Also observe static safe procedures and cautions as outlined in the sampling module user manual Sampling modules are very sensitive to ESD CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Autoset Considerations Autoset acquires samples from the input signal and attempts to take the following actions based on the input data m Evaluate the amplitude range of the input signals and offset of the vertical acquisition windo
208. ments of 3 48 customizing 3 58 why use 3 58 Waveform bar 2 6 Waveform databases behavior with automatic measurements 3 68 dimensions of 3 140 display 3 140 special features 3 139 To customize display of 3 143 to set up 3 141 two database limit 3 139 usage limitations 3 139 vs vector view figure 3 142 why use 3 139 with intensity display figure 3 144 Waveform Display defining waveforms for 3 50 keys to using 3 50 Waveform record 3 27 definition applied to all channels 3 19 illustrated 3 28 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Index Waveforms control operation vs selected 3 51 creating math 3 89 defining and displaying 3 50 histograms on 3 134 including comments with 3 108 live Glossary 6 mask testing 3 123 math Glossary 6 why use 3 90 measuring 3 65 operations on all views 3 52 operations on selected 3 50 purpose of mask testing 3 123 purpose of saving recalling 3 108 purpose of taking histograms of 3 134 Reference Glossary 8 testing and statistical tools 3 123 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual virtual keyboard with 3 108 Web site address Tektronix xv WfmDB Glossary 10 Window horizontal acquisition Glossary 5 vertical acquisition Glossary 9 Windows Safe mode 1 17 Windows 98 1 3 Glossary 10 reinstall 1 16 Y YT format Glossary 10 Z Zoom fast access to 3 49 Index 11 Index Index 12 CS
209. ments on waveforms See Figure 3 18 Optimizing Measurement Accuracy on page 3 83 tells you how to run compensation routines and deskew channels to optimize the accuracy of your measurements NOTE You can also make graticule measurements counting graticule divisions and multiplying them by the vertical or horizontal scales set for the waveform you are measuring Graticule Cursors R eadouts C1 5 mV div Measurement Measurement ClPeri 682 5ns Readouts Freq 1 465mH Cursor tl 1 013us R eadouts te 1 36u5 AE 346 705 lj t 2 884MHz Mean g3 94m Median 100m Std Dev 11 57m Pk Pk 51 25m HE lo aparo Liz 92 2 i3 97 095 Peak 445376 Hits 161126 Waveforms 32866 Figure 3 18 Graticule cursor and automatic measurements CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 65 Measuring Waveforms Taking Automatic Measurements Why Use Use automatic measurements to take more accurate measurements with less effort Because automatic measurements use the waveform record points they are usually more accurate than cursor and graticule measurements The instru ment does the work continuously taking updating and displaying these measurements Whats Measured You get to choose B Select from the extensive range of parameters this instrument can measure for a list see Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported BM Feed the entire waveform to a measurement or limit the measurement to a segment of the waveform By defaul
210. mes needed see the following topic BM Software Installation on page 1 15 CAUTION Be sure to create your emergency startup disk as described on page 1 14 You will need that disk if you ever need to reinstall Windows 98 from the instrument hard drive Check the Environmental Requirements Site Considerations Read this section before attempting any installation procedures This section describes site considerations power requirements and ground connections for your instrument The instrument is designed to operate on a bench or on a cart in the normal position on the bottom feet For proper cooling at least two inches 5 1 cm of clearance is recommended on the rear and sides of the instrument You can also operate the instrument while it rests stood up on its rear feet If you operate the instrument while it is resting on the rear feet make sure that you CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 1 7 Installation A Operating Requirements Rackmount Requirements properly route any cables coming out of the rear of the instrument to avoid damaging them CAUTION Keep the bottom of the instrument clear of obstructions to ensure proper cooling Specifications in Appendix A list the operating requirements for the instrument Power source and temperature humidity and altitude are listed If this instrument is rackmounted see the TDS8000 amp CSA8000 Rackmount Instructions for additional site considerations or operati
211. n as the source for each cursor Up to the time you turn cursors on you can select a waveform on screen to use it as the source for the cursors 3 78 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Measuring Waveforms m Once cursors are on selecting a different waveform does not change the source the cursors measure To change the source while cursors are on you must change the source in the Cursors Setup dialog box Turning cursors off restores the default cursor source assignment so that assignment again tracks the currently selected waveform Cursors Can Treat Sources Independently Each cursor can take a different independent source with each source having its own amplitude scale and time scale Consider the example presented by Figure 3 22 on page 3 78 B Cursorl is set to measure channel 3 C3 which is set to 100 mV div so the cursor readout v1 measures C3 relative to its ground as 3 divisions x 100 mV div or about 300 mv B Cursor 2 is set to measure reference R1 which is set to 20 mV div so the cursor readout v2 measures R1 relative to its ground as 3 divisions x 20 mV div or about 60 mv M Note that the value of each graticule division relative to the delta readout is not readily apparent because the delta amplitude readout Av must account for the different amplitude scale settings of the sources To do so the Av readout displays the results of v2 v1 60 mv 300 mv 240 mv automatically accounting fo
212. n cleaning the menu buttons or front panel buttons Before using any other type of cleaner consult your Tektronix Service Center or representative Flat Panel Display Cleaning The instrument display is a soft plastic display and must be treated with care during cleaning CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 153 Cleaning the Instrument CAUTION Improper cleaning agents or methods can damage the flat panel N display Avoid using abrasive cleaners or commercial glass cleaners to clean the display surface Avoid spraying liquids directly on the display surface Avoid scrubbing the display with excessive force Clean the flat panel display surface by gently rubbing the display with a clean room wipe such as Wypall Medium Duty Wipes 05701 available from Kimberly Clark Corporation If the display is very dirty moisten the wipe with distilled water or a 75 isopropyl alcohol solution and gently rub the display surface Avoid using excess force or you may damage the plastic display surface 3 154 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual r Appendix A Specifications NOTE This specification is for the instrument there are also specifications associated with the optical and electrical modules Please refer to the user manual that shipped with your module for those specifications This appendix contains the specifications for the CSA8000 Communica tions Signal Analyzer and the TDS8000 Digital Sampling Oscilloscope All specificati
213. n each time base are displayed fit to screen that is within the full 10 horizontal divisions that the graticule provides Waveform Operations that Cross Time Base Views Unlike the horizontal controls just described some controls apply to all time base views Turning a waveform on or off in any view displays or removes it from all views Selecting a waveform in any view makes it the selected waveform in all views for example select C1 in Main and then select Magl C1 is the selected waveform in Magl Turn on Mag2 and Mag displays on screen with C1 selected Vertical adjustments on a waveform in any time base adjust the waveform in all time bases Display Controls vs Acquisition Controls For channel waveforms the vertical offset control and the horizontal controls you set adjust the instrument acquisi tion parameters See the following descriptions for more information Vertical Acquisition Window Considerations on page 3 13 m Horizontal Acquisition Window Considerations on page 3 16 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Displaying Waveforms Mag1 and Mag2 are Magnifying Timebases The Mag1 and Mag time bases are so named because they cannot be set to a more coarse slower horizontal scale than that of the Main When set to a more fine faster horizontal scale they can be thought of as magnifying a segment of the Main time base In short M each Mag time base scale sets the size of an aperture on the Main time base
214. n fall and rise time calculations Typically set to 10 See Levels Used in Taking Amplitude Timing and Area Measurements on page B 6 for more details Math Waveform A waveform defined by a combination of one or more operands channel waveforms reference waveforms and automatic measurement scalars Math waveforms may also contain math operators and functions Measurement See Automatic Measurement Measurement statistics The accumulation of a history of individual measurement readouts showing the mean and standard deviation of a selected number of samples CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Glossary Measurement updating The process of automatically adjusting the measurement parameters to reflect changes in the waveform targeted by an automatic measurement MidRef The waveform middle reference level used in such measurements as Period and Duty Cycle Typically set to 50 See Levels Used in Taking Amplitude Timing and Area Measurements on page B 6 for more details Mid2Ref The middle reference level for a second waveform or the second middle reference of the same waveform Used in two waveform time measure ments such as the Delay and Phase measurements See Levels Used in Taking Amplitude Timing and Area Measurements on page B 6 for more details Persistence The amount of time a data point remains displayed There are three persistence modes available in the instrument Variable Infinite and Color Grading
215. n the front panel Virtual keypad A pop up pad that lets you enter specific numeric values for the control from which it is popped up Virtual keyboard A pop up keyboard that lets you click to type characters for the control from which it is opened such as in the vertical scale and offset controls found in the Control bar at the bottom of the display Waveform The visible representation of an input signal or combination of signals Waveforms can be channel reference or math waveforms Waveform cursors The cursor mode that presents two cursors you position to measure both the time and amplitude parameters if a waveform record The instrument displays the time of both cursors with respect to the trigger and the time between the cursors The instrument also displays the value of both cursors with respect to the waveform ground and between the cursors CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Glossary 9 Glossary Waveform database A collection of sequentially acquired waveforms WfmDB See Waveform database Windows 9 The underlying operating system on which this instrument runs YT format The conventional display format It shows the amplitude of a waveform record on the vertical axis as it varies over time on the horizontal axis Glossary 10 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Index Symbols Overshoot measurement B 2 A AC RMS measurement B 1 Accessories list 1 35 optional 1 36 standard 1 35 Accura
216. nce R1 R6 Overview To recall a waveform Control elements amp resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must have appropriate sampling modules in place before powering on the instrument Instrument must be powered up m See Sampling Module User Manuals for sampling module installation m See Power On Instrument on page 1 12 Display the Re 2 From the application menu bar select File and then Ele Edit View Setup Utilities He call Waveform select Recall Waveform See right Nr dialog box ave Setup As Save Waveform The Recall Waveform dialog box allows navigation to directories lists waveform files in the directory and Recall Waveform provides for selection of a waveform file Comments for m SS selected files appear in the comment box See below zu ees Page Setup 1 FrameScanl stp Recall Waveform FE 2 FrameScanz stp 3 FrameScanl stp Exit L3 Filename MainC1 wtm Files of type waveform files wirn wdb Close Comment Output 4 Test Seq AD4 TP 101 Help DUT Pouall4 Recorded 279 00 By Alex T Evans ATE Recall into R2 empty E reference 3 112 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Data Input and Output Overview To recall a waveform Cont Control elements amp resources Name a 3 Use the Look in drop down list and buttons see right Recall Waveform RES Look in date ry al c i destination to navigate to the directory which contains
217. ncoming inspection 1 19 Testing Waveforms masks histograms and waveform databases 3 123 Time base Glossary 8 view Glossary 9 Tool bar 2 6 Touch screen inoperable in Windows Safe mode 1 17 Touchscreen operations equivalent with mouse 3 53 Trigger Glossary 8 clock recovery source 3 39 DIRECT connector 3 39 3 41 Edge Glossary 4 inputs 3 40 Level Glossary 9 level 3 38 modes 3 39 PRESCALE connector 3 39 3 41 probe used to connect 3 41 slope 3 38 sources 3 39 vs untriggered displays illustrated 3 39 Trigger inputs usage limitations 3 41 Trigger MAIN LEVEL knob 3 38 Trigger point defined 3 27 Trigger source usage limitations 3 41 Triggering 3 37 3 92 3 100 based on application 3 40 edge 3 38 3 46 high frequency 3 42 holdoff 3 42 how to set 3 45 keys to using 3 37 metastability reject 3 42 overview of process 3 37 overview of 3 37 purpose 3 37 why use 3 37 U Update software 1 3 Index 9 Index Upgrade firmware 1 3 URL Tektronix xv Usable holdoff 3 43 User Interface Controls bar 2 6 map 2 6 Measurements bar 2 6 Menu bar 2 6 Readouts bar 2 6 readouts display 2 6 Status bar 2 6 Tool bar 2 6 Waveform bar 2 6 User Interface application software 1 3 User manual main 2 2 sampling modules 2 2 User Wavelength compensation how to perform 3 87 V Va
218. nd properties Properties Drag ground reference icon to add Sh offset to a waveform T Drag across the waveform area to zoom the boxed waveform segment to full screen width Ic ioo omw asd orae aA CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 2 9 i eee Display Map Multiple Views Drag the markers to enclose the portion of waveform to appear in Mag 2 View Drag the markers to enclose the portion of waveform to appear in Mag 1 View emi AEC Rurstop Sample Enehal Direct zl fpo BE 5o e swede E nuuc aae fanda alaa aal E a wtp LJ IX bee NL AEN EV sum BE SEU CIN I IW NEG wo ae MAIN View Drag the border between graticules to vertically size Main Magl and Mag2 Views Mag 14 View Mag View 2 10 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual a Front Panel I O Map Floppy disk drive accessible Ed from Windows 98 ooo CJ3C9CJ Eu ts 53 E O E O E ONO us S80 Compartments for large E modules up to two channels Th Ov INTERNAL CLOCK OUTPUT O lt x Compartments for small 1 DC CALIBRATION OUTPUT modules up to eight channels 5 i i O E EXTERNAL 10 MHZ REFERENCE INPUT ANTISTATIC CONNECTION for wrist strap 1 MQ to ground TRIGGER TRIGGER TRIGGER PRESCALE DIRECT PROBE Input Input POWER CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 2 11 ee l Rear Panel I O
219. nd then select Copy in the Edit menu To Export Your Waveform The procedure to exporting waveforms is almost the same as the procedure to save a waveform Use the procedure To Save Your Waveform on page 3 109 while observing the following differences m Select Export Waveform from the the File menu instead of Save waveform The Export dialog box displays see Figure 3 25 that follows M You can only select and export one waveform at a time You cannot include comments with your exported waveform M Your exported waveform will contain the waveform data as a series of comma separated values no timing information but data is sequential 3 116 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Data Input and Output Export I x Histogram To file Program Files Fieferences sM anA tst i Export Figure 3 25 Export dialog box To Export Your Histogram Use the process just described for exporting a waveform on page 3 116 select the Histogram button in the Export dialog box see Figure 3 25 Also skip selecting a source The instrument supports a single histogram so the current histogram is automatically selected If no histogram is enabled in the Hist Setup dialog box the Histogram button will be disabled in the Export dialog box To Use an Exported How you use the exported waveform or histogram depends on your application Waveform or Histogram The following example is a simple application using a waveform the
220. ned High Low methods see page 3 69 Keys to Using The key points that follow describe operating considerations for setting up automatic measurements to obtain the best measurement results CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 67 Measuring Waveforms 3 68 Measurement Selection The instrument takes automatic measurements of the following categories Amplitude Timing Area and Eye Pattern Optical Check Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported for a listing of the measure ments that you can choose from in each category Number of Measurements The instrument can take and update up to eight measurements at one time You can apply measurements to any combination of sources described below You can take all eight measurements on C1 for example or one measurement each on Cl C8 Measurement Sources All channel reference and math waveforms can serve as sources for automatic measurements You can also measure either of the two waveform databases the instrument supports You can specify a waveform as source in the Meas Setup dialog box even if the waveform is not displayed Some measurements such as Gain Delay and Phase require two sources For example Gain would be used to measure an input from one measurement source such as C1 with respect to an output in another source such as C2 You can also specify a signal type for the source Pulse or Eye NOTE If you set Signal Type to type Eye the instrument ignores th
221. ng help to the front and the application Favorites Documents Settings Find d Click for Windows 98 Help 945 amp L2 ly Ep Log Off Leva kp Shut Down End of Procedure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 151 Accessing Online Help 3 152 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual r Cleaning the Instrument You may need to periodically clean the exterior of your instrument To do so follow the instructions in this section WARNING Before performing any procedure that follows power down the instrument and disconnect it from line voltage Exterior Cleaning CAUTION To prevent getting moisture inside the instrument during external cleaning use only enough liquid to dampen the cloth or applicator Clean the exterior surfaces of the chassis with a dry lint free cloth or a soft bristle brush If any dirt remains use a cloth or swab dipped in a 7596 isopropyl alcohol solution Use a swab to clean narrow spaces around controls and connectors Do not use abrasive compounds on any part of the chassis that may damage the chassis Clean the On Standby switch using a dampened cleaning towel Do not spray or wet the switch directly CAUTION Avoid the use of chemical cleaning agents which might damage the N plastics used in this instrument Use a 7596 isopropyl alcohol solution as a cleaner and wipe with a clean cloth dampened with deionized water Use only deionized water whe
222. ng requirements This document ships with the Option 1 R rackmount kit Install the Sampling Modules A A Check Your Sampling Module Manual s CAUTION Do not install or remove any sampling modules while the instrument is powered on Always power the instrument down before attempting to remove or insert any sampling module WARNING Sampling modules are inherently vulnerable to static damage Always observe static safe procedures and cautions as outlined in your sampling module user manual The sampling modules that you order with your instrument ship with the appropriate sampling module user manuals Read these manuals for instructions on how to install your sampling modules and then install them as outlined Sampling modules do not ship preinstalled CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Installation Large module compartments 2 Small module compartments 4 Connect ESD wrist strap here gt O 9e esu iu M rnd Sien NOTE After first installing a sampling module s or after moving a sampling module from one compartment to another you should run compensation from the Utilities menu to ensure the instrument meets it specifications You must run a compensation accessed from the Utilities menu whenever the extender configuration is changed from that present at the last compensation In short if you install or remove an 80E00 extender run a compensation If you exchange a extender for one of a different leng
223. nts Trigger An event that marks time zero in the waveform record It results in acquisi tion of the waveform as specified by the time base CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Glossary Trigger level The vertical level the trigger signal must cross to generate a trigger on edge trigger mode Uptime The number of hours the instrument has been powered on Vertical bar cursors The two vertical bars you position to measure the time parameter of a waveform record The instrument displays the value of both cursors with respect to the trigger and the time value between the bars Vertical Acquisition Window The range of values the acquisition system can acquire The maximum vertical size is set by the operating range of the sampling module installed and that of any probe installed on the sampling module For example an S80E00 sampling module set to its maximum 100mV div scale yields a 10 division vertical acquisition window of 1 V The vertical offset determines where in the operating range of the A D converter sampler is the signal positioned relative to ground Changing vertical position will simply change the space on the screen where the data is displayed View Any one of the three waveform displays the instrument provides Main Magl and Mag2 Each view has its own graticule and time base The instrument always displays the Main view the Magl and Mag views can be added and removed from the display using the View buttons o
224. og box and return to the Mask Setup dialog box End of Procedure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 131 Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases Counting Masks Mask counting statistics are displayed in the mask readout at the right side of the display Mask counting statistics are displayed as soon as you enable a mask and stay visible even if the mask isn t displayed on screen Waveform Cl 100 midi iex MashliMn C1 User Maskl l Mask 267 Mask 165 Mask number and hits count Total 148 Total number of hits in all masks Waveforms 11 lt Total number of waveforms for all masks If mask counting is enabled read the results as follows m Mask n Each mask in the standard is listed by number Mask 1 for example along side the number of hits in that mask M Total Displays the total of all hits in all masks m Waveforms Displays the number of waveforms that have been tested against the masks To zero the counts for all masks click Clear in the Mask Setup dialog box NOTE Executing Clear will clear not only the mask counts but also the underlying waveform data For example if mask testing on a waveform database the database data is cleared and accumulation is restarted and if mask testing on a waveform being averaged or enveloped Clear restarts the averaging or enveloping 3 132 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Using Masks Histograms an
225. olor Grade Waveform Pro perties Waveform E W aveform Label L3 Vertical Scale Vertical Position Vertical Offset Horizontal Scale 200 0 aH Horizontal Position C3 A 109 0mvi aH p 6 Choose a color from the Color pulldown list Click OK to dismiss the dialog Color grade a 7 Right click on the channel waveform or its icon See waveform right Waveform Icon Choose Color Grade from the menu that pops up N Color grading a waveform is one of several instrument operations that uses a waveform database There are Copy m two available so no more than two waveforms can be Send To Back color graded at the same time v Show Properties cs a 109 0mvi E jo CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 63 Displaying Waveforms Overview Customizations you can make Cont Related control elements and resources Reduce a wave 9 form to its icon 10 Right click on the waveform or its icon See right Choose Show from the menu that pops up to toggle the waveform between shown checked and hidden unchecked Tip Hiding a waveform is useful when you temporarily want to remove the display of a waveform without turning it off Hidden waveforms change their waveform icons in the Waveform bar left of screen as shown Waveform shown Change grati cule style and color For further 15 assistance 3 64 BS Waveform hidden From the application menu bar select Setup and then s
226. ons are guaranteed unless noted as typical Typical specifications are provided for your convenience but are not guaranteed Specifications that are marked with the symbol are checked in Performance Verification chapter of the service manual an optional accessory All specifications apply to the instrument and sampling modules unless noted otherwise To meet specifications three conditions must first be met The instrument must have been calibrated adjusted at an ambient tempera ture between 20 C and 30 C The instrument must have been operating continuously for 20 minutes within the operating temperature range specified The instrument must be in an environment with temperature altitude humidity and vibration with the operating limits described in these specifications NOTE Sampling Interface refers to both the electrical sampling module compartments and the optical module compartments unless otherwise specified Table A 1 System Signal acquisition Description Characteristics Number of input 8 acquisition channels maximum channels Number of small sam 4 compartments for a total of 8 channels pling modules compartments Number of large sam 2 compartments for a total of 2 channels pling modules compartments CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual A 1 Appendix A Specifications Table A 1 System Signal acquisition Cont Description Small Sampling Mod ule Interface L
227. or an external attenuator That is the ratio of the input measure to the output measure For example a 10X attenuator will attenuate or reduce the input voltage of a signal by a factor of 10 Automatic measurement An automatic measurement of a parameter and its numeric readout that the instrument takes and updates directly from a channel math or reference waveform in real time without operator intervention Automatic trigger mode A trigger mode that causes the instrument to automatically acquire if triggerable events are not detected within a specified time period CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Glossary 1 Glossary Glossary 2 Autoset A function of the instrument that attempts to automatically produce a stable waveform of usable size Autoset sets up the acquisition controls based on the characteristics of the selected waveform A successful autoset will produce a coherent and stable waveform display Average acquisition mode In this mode the instrument displays and updates a waveform that is the averaged result of several waveform acquisitions Averaging reduces the apparent noise The instrument acquires data as in sample mode and then averages it a user specified number of averages Bandwidth The highest frequency signal the instrument can acquire with no more than 3 dB x 707 attenuation of the original reference signal BER An acronym for Bit Error Ratio or Rate The principal measure of quality of a digita
228. or the histogram source and type Source Main C1 a Iv Enable Histogram Check Enable Histogram to start histogram counting display the histogram on screen and turn on the Histogram readout C Vertical Horizontal Use Wim Database Clear Click the Vertical or Horizontal histogram option button of you choice You can only display one type of histogram at a time Check if you want the data taken on an accumulation of the source waveforms a waveform database instead of on the currently acquired waveform Press Clear to reset the histogram count and to clear the data in the source waveform Histograms track numbers of counts Clicking Clear resets those counts to zero and begins counting from zero 3 136 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases Overview Set histogram dis 8 play options Use the Histogram to turn on and off the display of the selected histogram histogram counting remains enabled Use the color list to select a color for the histogram Selecta value in the Size box to adjust the histogram display on screen Select Linear to display histogram data linearly Bin counts are scaled linearly by dividing the bin count by the maximum bin count Select Logarithmic to display histogram data logarithmi Set histogram limit 11 controls cally Bin counts are scaled logarithmically Logarithmic scaling provides better visual details for bins w
229. or your noise measurement B 4 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported Timing Measurements Table B 4 Supported timing measurements Name ri nag t Tr ol a al AE ri C L n Burst Width Delay Fall Time Frequency Negative Crossing Negative Duty Cycle Negative Width Period Phase Positive Crossing Positive Duty Cycle Positive Width Rise time Category and Definition Timing measurement The duration of a burst It is the time from the first midref crossing in the burst to the last Measured over the entire waveform or gated region Timing measurement The time between the MidRef crossings of two different traces orthe gated region of the traces Timing measurement The time taken for the falling edge of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region to fall from a High Ref value default 2 9096 to a Low Ref value default 21096 of its final value Timing measurement The frequency taken for the first cycle in the waveform or in the gated region The reciprocal of the period Measured in Hertz Hz where 1 Hz 1 cycle per second Timing measurement The distance between the trigger and the first positive crossing of the MidRef default 50 amplitude point for a pulse Measured over the first pulse in the waveform or in the gated region Timing measurement The ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period
230. orms For example if you have a math waveform defined as M1 CI C2 you cannot define a second math waveform as M2 MI C3 You can however expand the second math waveform to M2 C1 C2 C3 Mag Time Base Expressions Sources for math expressions must be sources associated with the Main time base For example M3 C1 C2 uses these sources as acquired and displayed by the Main time base not by the Magl or Mag2 time base You cannot create M3 C1 Main C2 Magl m Waveform Databases as Sources If you assign a channel to a waveform database and then use the channel in a math waveform expression the data currently acquired in the channel is used not the data accumulated in the waveform database over time 3 90 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Creating Math Waveforms Keys to Using The key points that follow describe considerations for creating math waveforms that best supports your data analysis tasks How to Create You create math waveforms when you create a math expression You do so by applying numerical constants math operators and functions to operands which can be channel waveforms reference waveforms measure ments scalars or fixed scalars You can display and manipulate these derived math waveforms much like you can the channel and reference waveforms see Operations on Math Waveforms on page 3 95 Some examples of typical math waveforms follow Table 3 8 Math expressions and the math wavefo
231. ory installation information not covered in this manual Power On the Instrument Follow these steps to power on the instrument for the first time 1 Check that the line fuses are correct for your application Both fuses must be the same rating and type Fuse types require a unique cap and fuseholder See Table 1 2 and Figure 1 4 Table 1 2 Line fuses Cap amp fuseholder Fuse type Fuse part number part number 0 25 x 1 250 inch 8 A fast blow 250 V 159 0046 00 200 2264 00 5 x 20 mm 6 3 A fast blow 250 V 159 0381 00 200 2265 00 ood m PowerSwitch Fuses AC Power Figure 1 4 Line fuse and power cord connector locations rear panel 1 12 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Installation CAUTION Connect the keyboard mouse and other accessories before applying N power to the product Connecting the accessories after powering on the instrument can damage the accessories Two exceptions are the USB keyboard and mouse that ships with the instrument Both can be plugged or unplugged without first turning power off 2 Connect the keyboard and mouse observing the caution above Note that the instrument ships with a USB keyboard which plugs into the USB port see Figure 1 3 on page 1 11 for location and a USB mouse which plugs into the back of the USB keyboard NOTE Connection of the keyboard and mouse is optional You can operate most features
232. oupling The association of two or more circuits or systems in such a way that power or information can be transferred from one to the other This instrument supports direct coupling only at its inputs the user must provide any alternate coupling ac frequency filtering externally Cursors Any of three styles of paired markers that you can use to make measurements between two waveform locations The instrument displays the values expressed in vertical or horizontal units of the position of the active cursor and the distance between the two cursors Delay time See Horizontal Delay Digitizing The process of converting a continuous analog signal such as a waveform to a set of discrete numbers representing the amplitude of the signal at specific points in time Digitizing is composed of two steps sampling and quantizing Display system The part of the instrument that displays the three graticules one each for the Main Magl and Mag 2 time bases the waveforms and other display related elements waveform labels cursors test masks measurement annotations etc Dragging The act of changing your selection either by clicking mouse or touching touchscreen a point on the screen and pulling across the screen while holding down the key mouse or maintaining contact with your finger touchscreen CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Glossary 3 Glossary Glossary 4 Error detection Checking for errors in data transmission A c
233. ove sources disconnect any signal connected to the other source trigger and clock sources See External 10MHz Reference Input when using the Internal clock See Table 3 1 on page 3 40 for more information Click the Trig Source menu and selectthe trigger source to match your trigger signal in the pull down menu upper right corner of display Select source 3 slope and level Slope button Iv 50 a ie C1 100m Source Menu Trig Internal Clock External Direct i 4 External Fresc Jus af Internal Clock Clock Recover 4 Click the Slope button to toggle to the trigger slope you want positive or negative 5 Adjust the trigger level using the Set Level to 50 button or the Level list box as show at right or using those on the front panel shown in step 7 EH Level Controls CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 45 Triggering Overview To trigger Cont Control elements and resources LEVEL Verify 6 When the instrument is triggered the word Triggered is triggering displayed in the toolbar on screen You can use also the 63 trigger lights to verify triggering status as follows m READY lights when the instrument acquisition TRIGD system is running but the trigger system is not receiving valid trigger events This includes when auto triggering in absence of a trigger TRIG D lights when the instrument acquisition system is running and the tr
234. ox that displays Now the Horizontal position readout shows the time to first point and subtracting this value from the cursor readout yields the cursor position on screen relative to first point You can find the horizontal readout both in the dialog box and in the control bar at the bottom of the screen The following relationships hold Time to First Point Horiz Position when Horiz Ref Position is set to zero tl or t2 readouts Time to First Point Additional Time to Cursor Cursor Units Depend on Sources A cursor that measures amplitude or time will read out in the units of its source as indicated in Table 3 7 Note mixed sources require the delta readouts to follow the units of the cursor 1 source Table 3 7 Cursor units Cursors Standard units Readout names Horizontal volts watts rho ohms v1 v2 Av Vertical seconds bits t1 t2 At Waveform volts watts seconds bits v1 v2 Av tl t2 At 1 f the v1 and v2 units do not match the Av readout defaults to the units used by the v1 readout if the tl and t2 units do not match the At readout units defaults to tl readout units CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Measuring Waveforms To Take a Cursor Use the procedure that follows to take cursor measurements on waveforms Measurement Overview To take cursor measurements Related control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 Take cursor 2 measurements Atleast one waveform must be selected on scre
235. pen the Waveform Database dialog box by selecting Wfm Database in the Setup menu Choose from the following display options Color Choose color to draw the waveform database in colors that vary with how frequently each sample value occurs in the database Intensity Choose Intensity to draw the waveform database with varying intensities that vary with how frequently each sample value occurs in the database Emphasize Counts Move this slider control to change the grading intensity or colors Selecting a lower count value causes a larger distribution of bins with lower counts Invert Color Intensity Choose this option to reverse the color or intensity assignments to each grading partition Inverting the colors may make it easier to view the variations of color or intensities and makes it easier to see frequencies or occurrences with smaller numbers of counts See the illustrations on the next page to see examples of waveform database data using different display options CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual To change the display options of waveform database data on the graticule use To customize the database display Related control elements amp resources uu I See To Set Up a Waveform Database on page 3 141 Setup Utilities Help Tri i Vertical zi Horizontal Acquire Trigger Measurement Mask Display Histogram Cursors Wm Database TDR Display Options Grading Color C Intensity Em
236. per division 0 125 bits div yields 1 bitin 8 divisions which fits nicely on screen Set the starting 9 Setthe initial horizontal position to the first bit you want horizontal posi to acquire Use one of the two methods that follow tion m Automatic Enter your desired start bit location and then check the Auto Position box to enable the instrument to set the position as near as possible to match the bit specified in the Start Bit box Manual Adjust the Position control to align the Start of a bit to desired location in the frame Tip The later method is useful when you need to manually align a bit or waveform to a mask on the display Enable 10 In the dialog box click to check the FrameScan FrameScan Enabled box See right 11 To restart the scan at the first bit at any time click the Reset button CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual comm standard or To acquire in FrameScan mode Cont Control elements and resources All Timebases Made Lock ta Int 1O MHz C Seconds Bits Select a Bit Hate Set the bit rate manually 22 1 habit aH Frame Sean Set to 1 8 bit per division Timebase Main B N Scale Position 14 2 bits a Frame Scan First set the Enabled v Auto Position start bit U Start Bit Scan Bits n EJ 127 ER and then enable Help Auto Position Timebase MainT B Scale 125 0mbits EL Or set manually
237. phasize Courts Invert Color lntensity Help 3 143 Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases Notice the difference in intensities of the same data between these two illustrations In the top illustration this portion of data Is lighter in intensity signalling it is least occurring In the illustration to the right with Invert Color Intensity turned on this data appears much darker allowing you to see the data more clearly Figure 3 32 Waveform database data using the Intensity display option End of Procedure 3 144 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Ae Accessing Online Help This manual represents only part of the user assistance available to you the online help system integrated as part of the instrument user interface provides quick to access support for operating the instrument This section describes the help system and how to access it What s Available The instrument provides the following help resources online M Tool tips m What s This Help B Overview Help B Setup Procedures Guide Programmers Guide Why Use Use online help as your primary always on hand user information source for this instrument Most of the information you need to operate this instrument and use it effectively is found in the online help where you can quickly access it and display on your instrument screen Keys to Using The key points that describe operating considerations for using the onlin
238. ppy drive 5 to 90 with a maximum wet bulb temperature of 29 C ator below 60 C upper limits derates to 20 relative humidity at 60 C non condensing Altitude Operating 3 048 m 10 000 ft Nonoperating 12 190 m 40 000 ft Electrostatic dis Up to 8 kV with no change to control settings or impairment of normal charge susceptibility operation Up to 15 kV with no damage that prevents recovery of normal operation A 6 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 5 CSA8000 and TDS8000 Power consumption and cooling Specifications Power requirements Cooling requirements Characteristics 600 watts Six fans with speed regulated by internal temperature sensors A 2 51 mm clearance must be maintained on the bottom left side and right side of the instrument for forced air flow It should never be operated on a bench with the feet removed nor have any object placed nearby where it may be drawn againstthe air vents No clearance is required on the front back and top Table A 6 CSA8000 and TDS8000 Display Specifications Display type Display resolution Pixel pitch Characteristics 211 2 mm wide x 1 58 4 mm high 264 mm 10 4 inch diagonal liquid crystal active matrix color display LCD 640 horizontal by 480 vertical pixels Pixels are 0 33 mm horizontal and 0 22 mm vertical Table A 7 CSA8000 and TDS8000 Ports Specifications Video outputs Paral
239. pret the definitions of waveform in the category Eye Pattern Optical Amplitude Measurements Table B 1 Supported amplitude measurements Name C RMS nr AC RM fl Amplitude fit Cycle Mean dg Cycle RMS AP Gain High f Mid Category and Definition Amplitude measurement The AC RMS valued measured over the entire waveform or gated region gt Gam Sart 2 x Amplitude measurement The high value less the low value measured over the entire waveform or gated region Amplitude High Low Amplitude measurement The arithmetic mean over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region Amplitude measurement The true RMS voltage over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region Amplitude measurement The ratio of amplitude measurements for a source and destination waveform Measured over the entire waveform or gated region Amplitude orce nd p Amplitude source 1 Amplitude measurement The value used as 100 whenever High Ref Mid Ref and Low Ref values are needed as in fall time and rise time measurements Calculated using either the min max or the histogram mean or mode method See High Low Method on page 3 69 Measured over the entire waveform or gated region Amplitude measurement The midpoint level between the 0 and 00 amplitude levels Measured over the entire waveform or gated region _ High Low Mid gt CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual B 1
240. procedure is general and may require adapting for your spreadsheet or other data analysis tool Overview To use exported waveforms Control elements amp resources Prerequisites 1 MS Excel 97 running on a PC or on the instrument 2 Access to a waveform exported by the instrument m See Jo Export Your Waveform on page 3 116 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 117 Data Input and Output Overview Import the 3 waveform data In Excel select Open from the File menu Use the dialog box that pops up to navigate to the directory containing the file In the dialog that displays make the selections as shown right as you navigate through the Text Import Wizard You must select delimiter as your data type comma as the delimiter type and General as your data type Tip This step assumes MS Excel 97 your tool may have similar import features for comma separated da ta Check its documentation Begin your 5 Click on the row number to select the entire row chart containing your imported waveform values see left Select the Chart button from the toolbar see left or from the Insert menu 3 118 r Data preview To use exported waveforms Cont Control elements amp resources Text Import Wizard Step 1 of 3 The Text Wizard has determined that your data is Delimited If this is correct choose Next or choose the Data Type that best describes your data Delimited Characters suc
241. program called QAPlus Win is used to make the verifications No equipment is required QAPlus WIN is a comprehensive software application used to check and verify the operation of the PC hardware in the portable mainframe This procedure use QAPlus WIN to run its Quick Test to verify the instrument hardware To run QAPlus WIN you must have either a working keyboard or a working mouse or other pointing device installed and have Windows 98 running CAUTION Before running the QAPlus WIN tests be aware of the following problems and work arounds The QAPlus WIN discrete memory test fails if the system being tested contains more than 16 megabytes of RAM Since your product ships with more than 16 megabytes of RAM do not run the memory test from the Memory icon Use the Run Quick Test item from the Tests menu instead or use the Quick Test icon in the QAPlus WIN title box The QAPlus WIN hard drive test may report an incorrect number of tracks and cylinders for your hard drive This is an internal mapping problem but has no effect on the results of the test Bad sectors on your hard drive are still found and marked The installation program for QAPlus WIN stalls at the end of installation To continue after the installation stalls press CTRL ALI DEL highlight the QAPIlus WIN installation program and then click End Task The QAPlus WIN keyboard test does not respond correctly to keys used by Windows 98 Keyboards made for use with
242. ptical sampling module installed as outlined in its User manual optional test only if purchased with for your instrument CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 1 19 Incoming Inspection Perform the Diagnostics The instrument Diagnostics use internal routines to confirm basic functionality and proper adjustment Equipment None required Prerequisites First all Sampling modules to be diagnosed must be installed as outlined in their user manuals Second power on the instrument and allow a 20 minute warm up before doing this procedure 1 Set up the instrument From the application menu bar select Utilities and then select Diagnostics The Diagnostics dialog box displays See below Diagnostics Subsystem Level Area Level Test Level l subsystems sul Failures Control Proc azs EU Loop Halt on failure Acquisition 8 Jazz Loop count Abart Subsystem Acquisition 8 Area vertical Test A D Convert DAC Load 2 Select a diagnostics suite a In the dialog box click the Subsytem Level tab b Select the all the entries by clicking the first entry Control Proc and dragging down to select the rest All entries should be highlighted as shown above c In the Run box leave Loop and Halt on Failure unchecked 1 20 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Incoming Inspection 3 Verify that the diagnostic suite passes a Click the Run button to execute the diagnostics b The diagnos
243. quiring Waveforms Signal Connection and Scaling 3 4 Why Use This section presents an overview of the instrument features related to setting up the input signal for digitizing and acquisition It addresses the following topics M Where to find information for installing sampling modules and connecting input signals How to turn on channels and adjust their vertical scale position and offset How to set the horizontal scale position and record length of the Main time base View NOTE Terminology This manual uses the terms vertical acquisition window and horizontal acquisition window These terms refer to the vertical and horizontal range of the acquisition window which defines the segment of the input signal that the acquisition system acquires The terms do not refer to any windows or display windows on screen See Conventions on page xiv Vertical Vertical Vertical Offset Position Scale Acquisition Display system system Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Scale Position Record Length Figure 3 1 Acquisition and display controls Use signal conditioning and scaling controls to ensure the instrument acquires the data that you want to display measure or otherwise process To ensure the best possible data for further processing you do the following B Set vertical scale to adjust the waveform size on screen You can set vertical offset to shift the vertical acquisition window up or down on the signal to
244. quisition overview 2 5 cleaning 3 153 functional model 2 3 installation 1 7 key features 1 1 models 1 1 optional accessories list 1 36 options list 1 35 package contents 1 5 product description 1 1 standard accessories list 1 35 Interpolation Glossary 5 description of modes 3 60 Introduction to this manual xiii J Jitter Pk Pk measurement B 3 Jitter RMS measurement B 3 K Keyboard virtual Glossary 9 Keypad virtual Glossary 9 Knob Glossary 6 general purpose Glossary 4 Trigger MAIN LEVEL 3 38 L Level trigger 3 38 Linear interpolation 3 60 Glossary 6 Linearity measurement errors 3 6 Live waveforms Glossary 6 Low Glossary 6 Low measurement B 2 LowRef measurement level Glossary 6 Mag and Mag2 Views 3 53 Manuals part numbers 1 35 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual related xiii Map acquisition process 2 5 documentation 2 2 front panel 2 7 input output front panel 2 10 input output rear panel 2 11 system 2 3 user interface 2 6 waveform display 2 8 Mask testing 3 123 3 127 autoset to a mask 3 128 clearing statistics counts 3 132 count statistics 3 125 creating a user mask figure 3 126 definition of counts statistics 3 132 editing description 3 125 flexible features of 3 123 stopping acquisition based on 3 129 supported standards 3 124 to create a mask 3 133 to edit a mask 3 130 us
245. r the different scales of the cursor sources Time readouts behave similarly with regard to different sources with different time bases Each cursor displays its time readout t1 or t2 with respect to the time base of its source and At is calculated as t2 t1 automatically accounting for any difference in the time base of each cursor source NOTE If a cursor readout does not seem correct check the source of each cursor in the Cursor Setup dialog box Each cursor readout relates to the amplitude and time base settings of their source Vertical Cursors Measure from the Trigger Point Remember that each vertical cursor measures the time from the trigger source to itself This relationship is shown in Figure 3 23 on page 3 80 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 79 Measuring Waveforms 3 80 Horizontal Ref 0 First sampled point Trigger point of cursor source ni MK FR P Cursor readout tn Time to first point Horizontal divs x sec div Cursor Figure 3 23 Components determining Time cursor readout values Note that a vertical cursor readout t1 or t2 includes and varies directly with the time to first point component which varies directly with the horizontal position set for the time base used by the cursor source waveform To see the amount of time to the first point press Horizontal Menu on the front panel and set Horizontal Ref to 0 in the dialog b
246. ral be aware that changes to source waveforms that you include as math expression operands are reflected in the math wave form See Source Dependencies on page 3 92 Display Considerations Turn on and off the display of math waveforms like you do channel and reference waveforms Use the same front panel controls waveform selection buttons vertical position and scale knobs and application controls waveform control bar elements at the bottom of the display vertical setup menu Mouse operation for positioning waveforms on screen work also As is true for channel and reference waveforms turning a math waveform on or off in any time base display Main Magl or Mag2 also turns it on or off in all the time bases 3 96 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Creating Math Waveforms To Use Math Waveforms The procedure that follows demonstrates some common operations you can perform on math waveforms Overview To use math waveforms Related control elements amp resources Prerequisites 1 The Math waveform must be defined and displayed See the reference listed at right See To Define Math Waveforms on page 3 93 Select and dis 2 Press the Vertical MATH button The button of the VERTICAL play currently displayed and selected math waveform will light amber the buttons of all other currently displayed math waveforms will light green Math waveforms not displayed remain unlighted Press any waveform button to make
247. re across all active channels This same trigger is also common across all time bases currently active one or more of Main Magl and Mag2 Edge Trigger Type This instrument supports edge triggering only in which edge triggers gate a series of acquisitions The slope control determines whether the instrument recognizes the trigger point on the rising or the falling edge of a signal See Figure 3 11 You can set the trigger slope from the toolbar at the top of the display or in the Trigger Setup dialog box The level control determines where on that edge the trigger point occurs The instrument lets you set the trigger level from the front panel with the Trigger LEVEL knob Positive going edge Negative going edge Trigger level can be adjusted vertically Trigger slope can be positive or negative with trigger point occurring on the slope specified Figure 3 11 Slope and level define the trigger event CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Triggering Trigger Modes The trigger modes control the behavior of the instrument when not triggered Normal mode sets the instrument to acquire a waveform only when triggered Normal mode does not acquire data if triggering stops rather the last waveform records acquired remains frozen on the display if the channels containing them are displayed If no last waveform exists none is displayed See Figure 3 12 Normal trigger mode Auto mode sets the instrument to acquire a wav
248. riable Persistence display mode 3 60 Vectors 3 60 Vectors Display menu 3 60 Verification incoming inspection procedure 1 19 Vertical Bar cursors Glossary 9 position 3 6 range acquisition window Glossary 9 scaling 3 4 set up procedure 3 8 signal connection 3 4 Vertical acquisition window Glossary 9 control set up 3 9 overview 3 13 Vertical deskew Glossary 2 Vertical offset discussion of 3 13 illustrated 3 14 usage limitations 3 5 Vertical position illustrated 3 14 Vertical range what determines 3 13 Vertical scale and offset why use 3 4 Vertical set up purpose 3 4 View graticule 3 51 Main amp Mag 2 9 operations on selected 3 51 that magnify 3 53 time base Glossary 9 using multiple 3 51 Views multiple 3 49 Index 10 Virtual keyboard Glossary 9 dialog box 3 102 3 108 Virtual keypad Glossary 9 W Waveform Acquiring of 3 3 channel Glossary 3 cursors Glossary 9 database Glossary 10 databases using 3 139 defined Glossary 9 display 2 6 overview of 3 47 displayed fit to screen 3 52 displaying 3 47 exporting 3 116 how to display in a Mag View 3 57 how to display in Main View 3 55 how to recall 3 112 how to save 3 109 how to use an exported 3 117 printing 3 120 purpose of databases 3 139 recalling 3 108 saved Glossary 8 saving 3 108 selected 3 7 Glossary 8 Waveform display ele
249. rid adoro vein Fut a ewe aU d d 3 108 Whats d xeluded cctsnacvasds os cones P REUS PORE d SEAI DEAR 3 108 To Save Your Waveform 25 545406804 esa ardida A Rond ae dos d a sees 3 109 To Recall Your Wav ctor uud eius s esquwei vu wu dq exu uad dup uod dead 3 112 NG leap ROIGICHCCS 424 scereo sed Pos edebueeqicurVuiqew uua dira dr EU 3 115 Exporting Waveforms and Histograms 0 cece eee eee eens 3 116 T SCT 4 Agen bas be tee Go en ooo oe a usque que see a vip uar dicU a wn 3 116 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual V Table of Contents vi Revo A i pane anans he pao en keds ROS Oe ese oe NEST pee eae 3 116 To Export Your Waveform 151329 554 2564 tx dus AIO UE RU Be hrinti ii 3 116 To Export Your Histogrammi aa scu scire 054 E ah rE P Eod Praha 3 117 To Use an Exported Waveform or Histogram 00055 3 117 Pinning M AVE FOEITIS 3 24 20 04 nsn haunts ae panes aoa Ve Dd i U ORE de Pb ees 3 120 Remote C OPHIBUTHO CIO So 3 22 809 E SOLO doe epu o PCI T ERIS dE Pd Verdes 3 121 Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases 3 123 Mask Testing Waveforms 2 succede a RESuRXSORA RSUK RU EGCEHR CHE Ed be dO RE 2 3 123 Wity Wee Avr 3 123 b dori chose a rrrrrrrTcm 3 123 Flexible Mask Editi uu dus ucba SERRE DRE DU ew eb be Pd Res os 3 123 Mask Specific Autoset ui dus urba SEX nannan PU E ERR YA eei d RES 3 124 Whats Excluded rrrrre 3 124 Keys
250. rigger capabilities connector with Holdoff Auto Normal Metastability Reject On Off External prescaled trigger specifications apply only under the condition that no other trigger source is applied to respective connectors 5 hort term optimized mode and locked to internal 10 MHz reference specifications only apply under the condition that there is no external 10 MHz reference applied to the front panel connector External prescaled 50 Q AC coupled input resistance divide by eight prescaler ratio fixed triggerinputcharac X level zero volts teristics External prescaled 2 5 Vpp trigger absolute maxi mum input External prescaled The limits are as follows trigger sensitivity Frequency range Sensitivity 2 3 GHz 800 mV 3 10 GHz 600 MV pp External prescaled Frequency range Sensitivity trigger sensitivity typ cal us 10 12 5 GHz 1000 MV op typical External prescaled 1 5 ps RMS 10 ppm of horizontal position or better trigger delay jitter Short term optimized mode External prescaled 1 0 ps RMS 5 ppm of horizontal position typical trigger delay jitter Short term optimized mode Typical External prescaled 2 5 ps RMS 0 10 ppm of horizontal position or better delay jitter locked to internal 10 MHz refer ence mode External prescaled 1 6 ps RMS 0 05 ppm of horizontal position typical delay jitter locked to internal 10 MHz refer ence mode Typical External prescaled Enhanced Triggering Met
251. rigger event and delayed from that event by horizontal delay sample interval x sample number 1 When all the points in the waveform record have been sampled and digitized the waveform record is in acquisition memory and becomes available for display or use in math waveforms storing exporting and elsewhere See Acquisition Cycle which follows For a control oriented discussion of the waveform record see W Horizontal Acquisition Window Considerations on page 3 16 m Horizontal Scale vs Record Length vs Sample Interval vs Resolution on page 3 17 The process of building a record is a subpart the acquisition cycle which describes how the instrument cycles through recognizing a trigger taking a sample and processing it according to sample mode and adding it to a waveform record This manual describes the normal acquisition cycle in Process Overview Map on page 2 6 Note the following points regarding acquisition cycles A waveform record exists either on display or as an icon on the waveform bar until it is replaced by a more recent acquisition or until you clear the record The process of clearing waveform records is described on page 3 25 M Choose the FrameScan cycle when you want to test for anomalies in Pseudo Random Bit Streams See FrameScan Acquisitions on page 3 29 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Acquiring Waveforms FrameScan Acquisitions This instrument can modify its normal acquisition p
252. rms produced To Enter this math expression and get this math waveform normalize a waveform Shifted and scaled to fit a std template Source Waveform Normalized Math Waveform C1 Meas1 Meas2 1 05V x where EN m CHAN Clis Naveo shown left 0 8V Measl Low of Cl Meas2 amplitude of C1 00V 4 Simulate ac coupling and integrate DC component removed before integration Source Waveform 50V Intg C1 Meas1 where o C1 is waveform shown left LOV um c Measlis set to take the Mean of Cl Sources Math Waveforms can incorporate the following sources AC Integration Math Waveform B Channel waveforms B Reference waveforms B Measurement scalars automated measurements that measure channel or reference waveforms in any time base M Fixed scalars that you enter as numerical constants in expressions CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 91 Creating Math Waveforms 3 92 Source Dependencies In general math waveforms that include sources as operands are affected by updates to those sources m Shifts in amplitude or DC level of input sources that cause the source to clip also clip the waveform data supplied to the math waveform M Changes to the vertical offset setting for a channel source that clip its data also clip the waveform data supplied to the math waveform M Changes to the acquisition mode globally affects all input c
253. rocess to help you analyze pattern dependent failures in high bit rate communications signals Why Use FrameScan acquisitions allow detailed display and analysis of individual complete waveforms or of the bit sequences leading up to a failure This ability to identify the specific patterns that caused the failures makes using FrameScan mode superior to traditional methods Traditional methods include B creating an eye diagram which is a statistical representation of signal using clock triggered sampling oscilloscope m bit error testing to find the total number of errors in a frame These methods are time consuming to use and neither can examine in detail the pattern driving the failure What s Special FrameScan acquisition mode offers the following advantages Breakthrough time base stability Timing accuracy varies no more than 0 1 part per million from trigger event to data point providing the stability needed to examine signals of almost any length for pattern dependent failures Flexible set up support Set bit rates manually or set a bit rate based on a communication standard Then set the horizontal scale manually or invoke a custom autoset Bit Eye Pattern Autoset if you have set an independent bit rate or Standard Mask Autoset if you set bit rate based on a communication standard Identification and analysis of pattern dependent failures FrameScan acquisition when used with mask testing and Stop After condition acq
254. rom the online help finder see below choose from the three tabs Contents Index Find Click a book and then click Open Or click another tab such as Indes Onecreen Keyboard C Graticule display Setup dialog box overviews ee Acquisition Setup a Cursors Setup 2 2 Cursor Action settings 2 Cursor 1 jettings 2 Cursor 2 ettings C Display Setup C Horizontal Se up Qe Histograms 5 C Mask Setup C Measure Setja TOA Setup Print Cancel 8 Click the book icons to expose topic titles and then Click a topic to highlight it Click the Display button to open the topic in a help window 3 148 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Accessing Online Help Overview To use the online help Cont Control elements amp resources For instruction 9 You can display step by step setup instructions for ss HeldTriggered Maveformss D procedures setups you wantto make From the application menu ma Help Contents and Index i bar select Help and then select Setup Guide See Loue o righ t E Programmer hide About TOS CS4 8000 10 Selecta procedure from the list that displays The procedure will display in a help window that is sized and located to minimize interference with the controls needed to perform it See below x EI d Meca Mask TOR Dip Wm Database Hist Cursor Meas Vert Horz Acq Trig Acquisition Mode C Sample JL C Average 16Samples
255. rtical Cursors Trigger point T Waveform Cursors CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Parameter measured Horizontal cursors measure amplitude volts watts Each cursor measures with respect to m yl LevelatCursor 1 with respect to its source ground level m y2 LevelatCursor 2 with respect to its source ground level Ay LevelatCursor 2 Level at Cursor 1 Level is cursor displacement from the source ground times the source volts div Note that the two cursors may have different sources and therefore can have different volts div settings Vertical cursors measure distance time in seconds or bits Each cursor measures with respect to m t1 Time atCursor 1 with respect to the trigger point m t2 Time at Cursor 2 with respect to the trigger point m At Time atCursor 2 Time at Cursor 1 Time is divisions of displacement of the cursor from its source trigger point times the source time div Note that the two cursors may have different sources and therefore can have different time base Main Magl Mag2 settings Waveform cursors measure both voltage and time Each cursor is in effect both a vertical and horizontal cursor Neither of these paired cursors can be moved off the waveform Note that sources can have different volts div settings Cursor readout Cursors vi 201 9mv v2 l i 6mv Av 303 5mv Cursors F1 1 5 1us t2 4 6us AL 2 5 5us l AE 399 2KHz vl 123 6m
256. rtical window displays on screen changing vertical position simply changes the space on the screen where the data is displayed You can set the vertical scale position and offset of each channel independently of other channels CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 13 Acquiring Waveforms The vertical scale and position controls do not affect the vertical acquisition window rather they adjust the display system to display the waveform as follows m The vertical scale per division setting determines the portion of the vertical acquisition window that appears in the graticule allowing you to scale it to contain all of the window or only part Figure 3 2 shows two vertical acquisition windows that contain the entire waveform but only one window contains the entire waveform in the graticule on screen a Volts Div setting determines the size of the display graticule within the vertical acquisition window scale set to 50 mv div 490 50 volt Vertical window 40 25 volt Graticule 0 25 volt 0 50 volt b Vertical position can change location of display graticule within 5 divisions position set to 4 divisions cesses s DO VOTE 30 45 volt Vertical window Graticule eec 0 05 volt 0 5 volt Figure 3 2 Setting vertical scale and position of input channels 3 14 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Acqu
257. s Or Select all waveforms in a given timebase by clicking the timebase for example click Main Tip If your instrument lacks a keyboard you can t use the control key to extend selections However you can touch or click individual waveforms or timebases to select them Specify the directory and filename s in which to save your waveform s If you ve selected a single waveform you can m Use the default name and directory appearing in the File Path field Click to access the file system see right and navigate to a new directory Rename the file and or change the directory by typing a new name and path into the F ile Path field If you ve selected multiple waveforms the file path field will change to Dir P refix You can edit the path and the prefix used for the filenames as just described All files will save into the same directory The file path field will change to Dir P refix To save a waveform Cont Control elements amp resources Save selected waveforms to C Reference File s File Path CAM Documents UI D ata M ainC1 wfm amp Select waveforr s Select waveforms individually Select all waveforms in timebase Edit path and file name Save selected waveform to Reference Ri empty r File s File Path C My Documents UI Data MainC1 wfm Access to virtual keyboard Access to file system CSA8
258. sample in a waveform database has a third dimen sion of count The count represents the number of times a specific waveform point has been acquired or generated Why Use Use waveform databases to take measurements run histogram calculations and do mask testing based on a waveform accumulated in a database rather than a single waveform stored in acquisition memory What s Special Some waveform database features of note follow m Waveform record length is not limited to 500 horizontal waveform database dimension and number of horizontal display columns when waveform databases are active Record lengths can vary over the entire allowable range To emphasize the data that occurs less frequently you can toggle the Invert Color Intensity control in the Waveform Database setup dialog box which reverses the intensity color assignments to each pixel in the database display Whats Excluded The following operations are excluded References as sources Because references contain static data that does not update they are not available as a waveform source for waveform databases More than two waveform databases More than two waveform databases cannot be created at one time Note the following behaviors regarding waveform databases There are only two waveform databases you can explicitly assign and reassign Databasel and Database2 to waveform sources in the Wfm Database dialog box M Once the two databases are allocated the
259. sampling modules before applying power and before connect ing them to the signals you want to test See your sampling module user manual for instructions WARNING Sampling modules are inherently vulnerable to static damage Always observe static safe procedures and cautions as outlined in your sampling module user manual Coupling Concerns Electrical sampling modules provide only straight DC coupling to their sampling circuits with no protection All modules specify a maximum vertical nondestructive range that limits signals to small levels typically about 2 to 3 volts DC ACpk pk See Specifications in the user manual for your sampling module for exact limits Do not exceed the limit even momentarily as the input channel may be damaged All modules also specify a dynamic range that if exceeded could cause acquisition and measurement errors due to nonlinearity Do not exceed this limit See Specifications in the user manual for your sampling module for exact limits NOTE Optical sampling modules may have dynamic range exceeded without obvious visual indications onscreen because the photo detector and or filters used may not necessarily be able to pass through overloaded signals to the sampler Use external attenuators if necessary to prevent exceeding the limits just described Note that there are no hardware bandwidth filters in most sampling modules or in the instrument Some optical sampling modules have bandwidth filters
260. set see Reference Levels Method on page 3 70 Mid2Ref the middle reference level for a second waveform or the second middle reference of the same waveform Used in two waveform time measure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported ments such as the Delay and Phase measurements You can choose how this level is set see Reference Levels Method on page 3 70 Levels Used in Taking Eye Measurements All eye diagram measurements are based on the power level the voltage level or the time locations of edges within each acquisition Figure B 2 shows an eye diagram and the areas from which values are taken that are used to calculate measurements PTop TCross TCross ELEM K PCross PBase Eye Aperture Figure B 2 Eye diagram and optical values P Values The P values include the mean and standard deviation of the vertical location of PTop and PBase These areas are used with a specified sample size to statistical ly measure the following values B PTopmean the mean value of PTop m PToPsiema the standard deviation of PTop CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual B 7 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported T1 Values T2 Values DCD Values B 8 W PBasemean the mean value of PBase within the Eye Aperture m PBasesioma the standard deviation of PBase within the Eye Aperture l The Eye Aperture defaults to the center 20 of the interval from TCross to Tcross
261. settable from the Vertical Setup menu of the instrument See the user manual for your optical sampling module for more information Scaling Offset and Positioning Considerations These key controls determine the portion of the input signal presented to the acquisition system Set the vertical offset to display the features of interest on your waveform and avoid clipping See Note that follows Adjust the display control Vertical Scale to control the portion of the vertical window displayed on screen adjust the display control Vertical Position to position the waveform on screen Note that vertical offset affects the vertical acquisition window but vertical scale and position do not These last two controls are display controls only Vertical Acquisition Window Considerations on page 3 13 describes the vertical acquisition window CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Set horizontal scale position and resolution record length so that the acquired waveform record includes the signal attributes of interest with good sampling density on the waveform The settings you make define the horizontal acquisition window described in Horizontal Acquisition Window Considerations on page 3 16 Good sample density might be at least five samples on each waveform transition when acquiring for timing measurements The trade off for increased sample density is increased time
262. setting up the instrument time base views so that they best support your data analysis tasks Waveform Display In general the method of displaying a waveform is to define the waveform and then turn it on Table 3 2 summarizes this process as it applies to the different waveforms Table 3 2 Defining and displaying waveforms Channel C1 C8 Install sampling modules in the instrument Push the Vertical CH button and then push one of compartments the numbered buttons 1 8 Reference R1 R8 _ Define an active reference waveform by Defining a reference waveform as is described at left turns on its display m saving a channel reference or math waveform to one of locations R1 R8 After a waveform is defined use the Vertical REF button with the waveform number buttons to turn the recalling a waveform previously saved to a file waveform on and off into one of locations R1 R8 Both of these operations can be performed from the File menu Math M1 M8 Define a math waveform using existing sources When defining a math waveform you turn it on in channel and reference waveforms and measure the Define Math dialog box ment scalar values After the waveform Is defined use the Vertical This operation can be performed by selecting the MATH button with the waveform number buttons to Edit menu and then selecting Define Math turn the waveform on and off 1 The waveform number buttons affect C1 C8 R1 R8 or
263. shown below Source Region Hilow RefLevel Tracking Method Auto C Min Max C Made C Mean Select among methods M Track High High 15 00mv Ed Check to use method you select y W Track Low Low 15 00 y a uncheck to enter level directly High Low Tracking Method Depending on which measurement you select High Low or both tracking will be enabled with their boxes checked as shown above You can select among the several modes the instrument provides for determining these levels m Mode of Histogram sets the values statistically Using a histogram it selects the most common value either above or below the midpoint depending on whether it is defining the high or low reference level Since this statistical approach ignores short term aberrations overshoot ringing and so on Mode is the best setting for examining pulses See Figure 3 20 High Min Max High Mean N f High Mode A rn At Mid Reference Low Mode me Low Mean Vi WIM bou Mo 0 0 0 0 0 V Figure 3 20 High Low tracking methods m Mean of Histogram sets the values statistically Using a histogram it selects the mean or average value derived using all values either above or CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 69 Measuring Waveforms 3 70 below the midpoint depending on whether it is defining the high or low reference level This setting is best for examining eye patterns and op
264. sk that you can use to restart your instrument in case of a major hardware or software failure You should create this disk and then store it in a safe place CAUTION Create this disk and store it in a safe place It may allow you to recover your Windows 98 installation without rebuilding the entire instrument hard disk The emergency startup disk contains basic files to restart your instrument It also contains files to check and format the hard disk Follow these steps to create the emergency startup disk 1 Push the RUN STOP front panel button to stop acquisition 2 Minimize the application to the Windows Task bar by clicking the minimize button in the upper right corner of the user interface screen 3 Click the Windows 98 Start button point to Settings and click Control Panel 4 Inthe Control Panel window double click Add Remove Programs 5 Click the tab for the Startup Disk page 6 Insert a floppy disk into the disk drive and follow the on screen instructions to create the startup disk 7 You can restore the UI application to the screen by clicking its button in the Windows Task bar CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Installation Back Up User Files Software Installation Description CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual You should back up your user files on a regular basis Use the Windows 98 Back Up tool to back up files stored on the hard disk The Back Up tool is located in the System Tools fold
265. st Spec StarComm_TDRO34 Tip Use comments frequently The comment that you enter appears when you or others later select your setup in this dialog box or in the Recall Setup dialog box In the first case it might help you avoid overwriting a setup you wanted to keep in the second case it can help determine the purpose of the setups saved earlier Save your setup 9 Click the Save button to save the setup file To cancel without saving click Cancel button Cancel Help For more 10 For more help on saving setups click the Help button information in the Setup dialog box to access contextual help on A screen See page 3 145 to learn about using online help End of Procedure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 105 Data Input and Output To Recall Your Setup Use the procedure that follows to recall a setup to the instrument Remember that recalling a setup replaces the existing setup which is lost Overview To recall your setup Control elements amp resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument should have appropriate sampling modules in place for the setup to be recalled You must have access to a setup saved by the instrument m See Sampling Module User Manuals for sampling module installation m See Power On Instrument on page 1 12 m See Keys to Using on page 3 102 Display the 2 From the application menu bar select File and then File Edit View Setup Utiities Hel Recall Setup sel
266. t the instrument takes each automatic measurement over the entire waveform record but you can use measurement gates to localize each measurement to the section of a waveform see To Localize a Measurement on page 3 75 B Select from these measurement sources channel reference and math waveforms and waveform databases 1 and 2 What s Special This instrument implements a robust automatic measurement system Some of the features adding value to this system follow Annotate Waveforms On Screen You can turn on annotations that mark character ization levels that each measurement uses to compute results See Figure 3 19 Annotations intersectto indicate the pages area determining measurement Figure 3 19 Measurement annotations on a waveform 3 66 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Measuring Waveforms Use Databases as Sources If you define the source you want to measure as a database in the Meas Setup dialog box you can use the database of that waveform as source The measurement you select operates on the accumulated waveform data databases accumulate repetitive instances of a source waveform Over time For example consider the Max measurement Max will capture and update the maximum most positive value encountered For a database source the ongoing Max measurements can only result in a higher max value as the database accumulates ongoing acquisitions This process causes the Max measurement readout to track max
267. t tab or Smooth lines in the Custom Types tab See NER em right Lit Column Area ld Columns with Depth Cones E Floating Bars l Line Column Lit Line Column on 2 Axes Lit Lines on 2 Axes le Logarithmic E Outdoor Bars Pie Explosion 2 50E 08 2 00E 08 1 50E 08 1 00E 08 5 00E 07 0 00E 00 5 00E 07 1 00E 08 1 50E 08 2 00E 08 2 50E 08 3 00E 08 Finish the 8 Click Next to step through the next two steps le IINE elect From User defined Built in NN File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help 175 433 F lines subtype from Excel 95 chart accepting the defaults settings at each step Click the JOSH SRY iecoc amp rid 931 tj Prompt I Arial 710 B Z U mme usd ui 5 A 90243072 Finish button in step 4 You should have a waveform display similar to that show right Tip This procedure assumes MS Excel 97 You can likely specify titles customize the treatment and labeling of the x and y axes etc in your data analysis application either as you create the chart or afterward Use the help for your data analysis application to determine if ithas these capabilities and for instructions in using them 5 00E407 1 00E 08 1 50E408 200E408 2 50E408 3 00E 408 17 33 49 65 81 97 113 129 445 161 177 193 209 225 241 For more 9 information
268. t than the others on the edge M The vertices numbers increase according to their order from left to right The instrument reassigns numbers to vertices during mask creation or editing to hold to this rule m When adding new points to a mask the instrument determines their location in the mask as follows see Figure 3 27 a Defines an imaginary line between the left most vertex and right most vertex in the mask b Defines all points above the imaginary line as the top of the mask all points below as the bottom of the mask c Inserts new user added points above the imaginary line into the top of the mask inserts new user added points below the imaginary line into the bottom B To create a mask with a concave area create several masks to cover the same area Data falling into two overlapping masks is counted only once as part of the total mask hits CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 125 Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases These points form Top bottom dividing line the top of the mask not displayed Left mostpoint These points form the bottom of the mask Figure 3 27 Creating a user mask Note in Figure 3 28 that a new vertex has been added to the mask shown in Figure 3 27 Since the point is added above the line it s added to the top ott 3 pa Ren A WE o Pigs ran sn gos Figure 3 28 Adding a new vertex 3 126 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Using Masks Histograms and
269. tally on screen as you change the Horizontal Scale control 6 Preview a status field that indicates when all waveforms are being previewed that is displaying an approximation of the waveforms as they will appear when acquisition completes This indicator may appear when you alter acquisition controls 7 Main Mag1 and Mag views selectable objects displaying on screen in the display each with its own display of any waveform that is currently turned on A CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Displaying Waveforms view is a representation of a signal on an associated time base the Main time base with the Main view which is always displayed or one of the two Mag views each with its own time base and graticule The display of the Mag views can be turned on or off You can display up to three views on screen Main plus Mag and Mag2 at the same time Touchscreen not shown a feature that lets you touch controls on screen to operate the instrument See Mouse and Touchscreen Operation on page 3 53 Why Use Use display features and controls to view test measure and otherwise analyze your waveforms What s Special This instrument provides a robust display Some features of note follow Flexible Display Control Front panel knobs and buttons support quick access to the most often used adjustments those that display position and scale waveforms Mouse keyboard and touchscreen interfaces support complete setup of all
270. te Failing to install the 50 ohm terminations can yield erroneous compensation failures or results See Equipment R equired on page 1 21 The compensation may take several minutes to complete Pass should appear as Status in the dialog box when compensation completes If Fail appears as Status rerun the compensation If Fail status continues after rerunning compensation and you have allowed warm up to occur the module or main instrument may need service End of Procedure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 85 Measuring Waveforms To Deskew Channels Overview Prerequisites Set up the reference channel Deskew the 6 channel 3 86 When making differential common mode or other measurements you may need to null out the propagation delay contributed by the input cabling between two or more channels Use the following procedure to adjust the deskew between channels Drive the connection circuitry with signals you want to deskew Set the instrument to trigger on the slope of the waveform that matches that of the edges you want to deskew Display the signals on screen Setup the channel to be used as the reference channel a Push the channel numbered button under Vertical on the front panel Use the Vertical SCALE knob and POSITION knobs to display the waveform edge to be deskewed to fill the screen vertically Use the Horizontal SCALE knob and POSITION knobs to display the waveform edges to be
271. ter describes your instrument which is either the CSA8000 Commu nications Signal Analyzer or the TDS8000 Digital Sampling Oscilloscope and its options Following this description are four sections M Check the Package Contents on page 1 5 shows you how to verify that you have received all of the parts of your instrument m Installation on page 1 7 shows you how to configure and install the instrument as well as how to reinstall the system software included with the product m Incoming Inspection on page 1 19 provides a procedure for verifying basic operation and functionality M Options and Accessories on page 1 35 lists the instrument options available and the standard and optional accessories for this product This manual supports two very similar instruments B The CSA8000 Communications Signal Analyzer m The TDS8000 Digital Sampling Oscilloscope Differences between the two instruments will be called out when necessary otherwise the material applies to both instruments The word instrument refers to either product The instrument is a high speed precision sampling system that finds use in M high performance semiconductor computer applications such as semicon ductor testing TDR characterization of circuit boards IC packages and cables and high speed serial digital data communications M high performance communications applications such as design evaluation and manufacturing test of datacom and te
272. th run a compensation For instructions on running a compensation see Optimizing Measurement Accuracy on page 3 83 Figure 1 1 shows compartments for both large and small sampling modules along with the plug in connector for the ESD wrist strap that you must use to install these modules Please place your sampling module user manuals in Appendix C of this manual to keep them handy OUTPUT C CALIBRATIO OUTPUT EXTERNAL 10MHz REFERENCE INPUT V MAX CH1 CH2 CH4 CH6 PRESCALE m Figure 1 1 Compartments for sampling modules CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 1 9 Installation Maximum Configuration Eight channels Two large modules and 1 10 three small modules Eight channels No large and four small modules Seven channels One large module installed in either compartment and three small modules You can install up to two large sampling modules and four small modules for a total of 10 inputs Of these 10 inputs only eight inputs can be active at one time see Figure 1 2 top two configurations Also note that installing a single large module in either compartment disables the first small module compartment This configuration see Figure 1 2 bottom configuration limits the input count to seven one from the large six from the small compartments
273. that the channel acquires in all acquisition modes Push the front panel button Acquisition MENU to display the Acq Setup dialog box Click each of the three acquisition modes and confirm that the following statements are true m Sample mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen Note that there may be a small amount of noise present on the baseline level M Average mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen with any noise present reduced m Envelope mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen with the upper and lower extremes of the noise displayed 6 Test all channels Repeat steps 3 through 5 until all optical input channels are verified Verify the After verifying the channels you can now verify that the time bases function Time Bases Work This verification is done using a front panel signal Equipment One SMA cable such as Tektronix part number 174 1427 00 Requires One 10x SMA attenuator such as Tektronix 015 1003 00 One electrical 80E00 series sampling module Prerequisites None l Initialize the instrument Push the front panel DEFAULT SETUP button 2 Hook up the signal source Connect the SMA cable from the Internal Clock output through a 10x attenuator to any 80E00 sampling module input channel as shown in Figure 1 11 CSA8000 TDS 8000 SMA cable from INTERNAL CLOCK output to 80E00 C3 input
274. the channel button turns amber to assign the waveform buttons 1 8 to operate on channel waveforms Push a waveform button to select the signal channel it displays Gm A waveform button lights when its channel is on m When on but not selected its button is lighted green When on and selected its button is lighted amber Hint To select one of the channels already displayed you can use a mouse and click its trace or its reference indicator to select it N C1 A wo N a I CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Overview To set the signal input Related control elements and resources Set the vertical 4 Use the Vertical Offset knob to adjust the selected acquisition waveform on screen Use the Vertical Scale and window Position knobs to adjust the display Positioned vertically Scaled vertically Offset vertically Set the horizon 5 Push the View Main button to make sure the main time tal acquisition base view is selected Use horizontal knobs to scale and window position the waveform on screen and to set sample resolution See right Scaled horizontally Positioned horizontally The Resolution Knob sets the record length S
275. the default mode of the acquisition Sample interval The time interval between successive samples in a time base display The time interval between successive samples represents equivalent time not real time Sampling The process of capturing an analog input such as a voltage at a discrete point in time and holding it constant so that it can be quantized Select button A button that changes which of the two cursors is active Selected waveform The waveform which is affected by vertical position and scale adjustments One of the channel selector buttons lights amber to indicate the currently selected waveform Sequential equivalent time sampling A type of equivalent time sampling in which one sample is taken per acquisition with each sample skewed incrementally with respect to an external trigger event This instrument acquires using sequential equivalent time sampling Saved waveform A collection of sampled points that constitute a single waveform that is saved in any one on reference locations R1 R8 or to the file system Slope The direction at a point on a waveform You can calculate the direction by computing the sign of the ratio of change in the vertical quantity Y to the change in the horizontal quantity The two values are rising and falling Time base The set of parameters that let you define the time and horizontal axis attributes of a waveform View The time base determines when and how long to acquire record poi
276. this manual for trigger setup information Execute 3 Push the Autoset button to to execute an autoseton the selected waveform If you use Autoset when one or more channels are displayed the instrument uses the selected channel for horizontal scaling Vertically all channels in use are individually scaled Note Autoset can execute on live waveforms either channel or math in the Main time base Click Define Autoset in the Utilities menu to display Autoset properties KE the Autoset properties dialog box To change the autoset Select mode criteria select from Edge C Period m Edge to setup for best display of the waveform edge C Bit Eye Pattern Cancel Help Period to set up for best display of a waveform period m Bit Eye Pattern to optimize for eye pattern display Click OK to set Autoset to use the current criteria To execute repeat step 3 above For More 5 For more information on the controls described in this Information procedure push click the HELP button in any dialog box or select Help Contents and Index in the Help menu End of Procedure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 11 Acquiring Waveforms To Reset the Instrument NOTE Autoset sets the vertical position to zero and adjusts the vertical offset to center the signal in the display If a standard mask is active for the selected waveform Autoset adjusts the selected waveform record to match the
277. thod described in High Low Tracking Method on page 3 69 Default Methods The waveform characterization methods just covered the High Low tracking and the reference level calculation methods used can be set for each measurement and its waveform source in the Meas Setup dialog box If you do not set the methods individually the instrument uses its default character ization methods CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 71 Measuring Waveforms To Take Automatic Use the procedure that follows to quickly take a measurement based on the Measurements default settings for High Low method and for reference level method Overview To take automatic measurements Related control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must display the waveform to be measured e on screen Z See page 3 23 for acquisition setup and page 3 45 for trigger setup Select the 2 Use the Vertical buttons to select the waveform to be E waveform measured The waveform may be a channel reference or math waveform 3 72 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Measuring Waveforms Overview measurements Select one of the measurement tool bars File Edit View Setup Utilities Help Triggered 0 Histogram Waveforms laj x ajz fel i Stop FL Trig Extemal Direct 7 mv aH 507 h 9 To see statistics 6 CSA8000 amp TDS8 Amplitude 123 Timin C110 vidi Eye Pattern Optical Measurement 1C
278. tical signals See Figure 3 20 Min max uses the highest and lowest values of the waveform record This setting is best for examining waveforms that have no large flat portions at a common value such as sine waves and triangle waves almost any waveform except for pulses See Figure 3 20 Auto switches between methods Auto method first attempts to calculate the high and low values using the Mode method Then if the histogram does not show obvious consistent high and low levels Auto method automatically switches to the Min Max or Mean method For example the Mode histogram operating on a triangle wave would not find consistent high and low levels so the instrument would switch to the Min Max mode Consistent high and low levels would be found on a square wave so the Auto mode would use the Mode method NOTE For Eye Pattern Optical measurements the High Low method choices are disabled The instrument always uses the Mean method for those measurements When setting High Low method be aware of these operating behaviors The tracking settings are not global that is you can independently set the method used for each of Meas 1 Meas 8 You can turn off tracking for either or both the High and Low levels and enter them directly Turning off tracking captures the current High Low values and enters them into High Low control fields where you can use them as starting values to modify Not all tracking methods are appropriate
279. tical power and general purpose measurements such as jitter and noise DC to 50 GHz optical bandwidth DC to 50 GHz electrical bandwidth with up to 12 5 GHz triggering FrameScan acquisition for isolating data dependent failures during confor mance performance testing and for examining very low level repetitive signals support for optical conformance testing of SONET SDH signals from 622 Mbps to 10 66 Gbps and for Fibre Channel 1063 and Gigabit Ethernet signals a large 10 inch color display that supports color grading of waveform data to show sample density an intuitive UI User Interface with built in online help displayable on screen CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Product Description Product Software The instrument includes the following software m Windows 98 comes preinstalled on the instrument Windows 98 is the Operating system on which the user interface application of this instrument runs The OS Rebuild CD 063 3491 XX includes the software needed to rebuild the instrument operating system if that becomes necessary M The User Interface UI Application product software comes preinstalled on the instrument This UI application complements the hardware controls of the front panel allowing complete set up of all instrument features The Product Software CD 063 3492 XX includes the UI Application for use if reinstalling the product software becomes necessary See Software Installa tion on page 1 15
280. tical units that match the vertical units of the source Count weights or density 32 bits Display When you assign a waveform database to a waveform source using the Waveform Database Setup dialog box you must explicitly turn on the waveform database display if you wish to see it on screen otherwise the waveform source displays using the default vector display The waveform database still accumulates in the background and can be turned on later without clearing the database CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases To Set Up To assign a waveform to one of the two waveform databases of the instrument a Waveform Database use the procedure that follows Overview To set up a waveform database Related control elements amp resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument musthave a waveform displayed to enable Im the waveform database controls Z See page 3 55 for information on displaying waveforms Open the Wfm 2 Open the Waveform Database dialog box by selecting Setup Utilities HelpTi Database Setup Wfm Database in the Setup menu wa o dialog box 3E eus Acquire Trigger Measurement Mask Display Histogram Cursors Wm Database TDR Select the source 3 Use the Source pulldown list to select a waveform source mes and turn on the for the waveform database By default the first available Manci 4 database waveform is used as the waveform source unless
281. tics may take several minutes to complete Verify that Pass appears as Status in the dialog box when the diagnostics complete c If instead an error number appears as Status rerun the diagnostics If Fail status continues after rerunning compensation and you have allowed warm up to occur the module or main instrument may need service End of Procedure Perform the Compensation This procedure uses internal routines to verify that the instrument compensates properly Equipment For electrical sampling modules Equo m 50 ohm terminators part number 015 1022 xx Quantity to match number of electrical channels to compensate The sampling modules shipped from Tektronix with the proper terminator installed Prerequisites First all sampling modules to be diagnosed must be installed as outlined in their user manuals Second power on the instrument and allow a 20 minute warm up before doing this procedure 1 Run the compensation routines a From the application menu bar select Utilities and then select Com pensation In the Compensation dialog box the main instrument mainframe and sampling modules are listed The temperature change from the last compensation is also listed See Figure 1 6 on page 1 22 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 1 21 Incoming Inspection 1 22 Compensation 21x Current Date Time 11 May 00 13 25 Select Action Mainframe Model Serial Date Time Status ATEMP Save TOS CSAs80
282. uisition can automati cally determine the bit at which a pattern dependent failure occurred Improved noise resolution on low power communication signals The instrument can use Average acquisition mode on Eye diagrams when acquiring using FrameScan mode Averaging provides the noise resolution that the examination of many of today s low power communication signals can require FrameScan mode results in sequentially acquired data which can be averaged normal eye diagrams acquire data randomly and cannot be averaged Compare the noise of the waveforms that follow The right waveform is averaged the left is not CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 29 Acquiring Waveforms 3 30 What s Excluded Keys to Using i i 7000p IS 230 0 pitti 822 1Mbits sec The instrument must be in Average or Sample acquisition modes FrameScan excludes Envelope acquisition mode The key points that follow describe FrameScan mode operating behavior and provide background to help you to use this feature Determine Start Bit and Scan Bits You need to know the bit in the bit stream at which you want to start the scan the appropriate horizontal scale the starting horizontal position and the total number of bits for the desired FrameScan cycle How FrameScan Mode Acquires FrameScan mode alters the normal acquisition sequence in order to scan a pseudo random bit sequence PRBS or another repetitive bit stream to acquire one bit at time
283. until you turn disable the histogram or clear the histogram counts If the histogram is not displayed on the graticule but histogram statistics still appear on the display histogram counting is still running NOTE Histogram counts are cleared when push Clear button in the Hist Setup dialog box or when you push CLEAR DATA on the front panel Also changing any acquisition control will implicitly clear all acquired data and the histogram count as well Histogram Size The maximum vertical histogram size is 400 bins The maximum horizontal size is 500 bins Recalling Setups The histogram state is restored to what it was when the setup was saved CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 135 Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases To Take a Histogram Use the procedure that follows to quickly take a measurement based on the default settings for histograms Overview To take a histogram Related control elements amp resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must have at least one waveform dis i a played to access the Hist Setup dialog box Z See page 3 55 for waveform display instructions if needed Access the 2 Open the Hist Setup dialog box by selecting Histogram in Setup Utilities Help histogram the Setup menu Vertical Harizantal Acquire Trigger Measurement Mask Display Cursors Wr Database TOR Set display and 3 Use the Source pulldown list to select a waveform source reset histogram f
284. up seen ase aa Es 3 104 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Data Input and Output Overview To save your setup Cont Control elements amp resources Name your 6 Name your setup file by either oorvaas a CommT est01 stp setu p f a Refs1 stp m accepting the default file name that appears in the File name text box File name clicking in the File name text box and typing a new Saveasbpe ScupFies sm 7m e Eenesl name replacing the default file name T Con Access to virtual keyboard clicking an existing name in the file list if any are listed Data in existing file will be overwritten Tip If your instrument lacks a keyboard touch or click on the virtual Keyboard Icon indicated right to display a virtual keyboard You can use the mouse or touch screen with the virtual keyboard to type entries in the name fields and comments fields If not selected select stp in the Save as type list box as the type of file Setup files are always type stp Tip Only change the type if you wantto temporarily see any other types of files in the current directory Otherwise leave it set at stp wc xy ees eap d nme qox adi Comment Does TDR on StarComm proto Add a comment 8 Enter a useful comment about each setup you save optional Write the comment such that it explains the purpose of Requires 80604 Sample Modul the saved file when that file is later accessed see right See Te
285. up but not down In contrast the Max measurement for a waveform source not included in a database will track variation up and down as new waveforms are acquired Take Eye Pattern and Optical Measurements To support characterization of communication networks and devices this instrument supports automatic measurements of Extinction Ratio Q Factor and Clock to Data Jitter on communications waveforms Characterize Measurements Independently To allow you control over how your waveform data is characterized by each measurement the instrument lets you set the methods used independently for each measurement See High Low Tracking Method on page 3 69 and Reference Levels Method on page 3 70 See Statistics on Measurement Results To see how any automatic measurement varies Statistically you can display a readout of the Min Max Mean and Standard Deviation the measurement results See step 6 on page 3 73 for instructions What s Excluded The following exclusions apply when using automatic measurements M More than eight measurements at one time are not allowed m Except for Average Optical Power all measurements of the category Eye Pattern Optical must be performed on a waveform database see Use Databases as Sources on page 3 67 The Average Optical Power measure ment cannot use a waveform database as its source M The Average Optical Power measurement cannot display Annotations see page 3 66 and cannot use gates or user defi
286. ust be expected This location is a typical office home environment Temporary condensation occurs only when the product is out of service Pollution Degree 3 Conductive pollution or dry nonconductive pollution that becomes conductive due to condensation These are sheltered locations where neither temperature nor humidity is controlled The area is protected from direct sunshine rain or direct wind Pollution Degree 4 Pollution that generates persistent conductivity through conductive dust rain or snow Typical outdoor locations Safety Certification Compliance Equipment Type Test and measuring Safety Class Class 1 as defined in IEC 1010 1 Annex H grounded product Overvoltage Category Overvoltage Category Il as defined in IEC 1010 1 Annex J Pollution Degree Pollution Degree 2 as defined in IEC 1010 1 Note Rated for indoor use only CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual A 11 Appendix A Specifications A 12 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Ae Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported All measurements are based on the power level the voltage level or the time locations of edges within each acquisition Tables B 1 through B 4 define the measurements this instrument supports within four categories Amplitude Timing Area and Eye Pattern Optical Refer to Figure B 1 on page B 6 to interpret the definitions of waveforms in the categories Amplitude Timing and Area Refer to Figure B 2 on page B 7 to inter
287. usually increase the horizontal timing jitter when external electromagnetic fields are applied For fields up to 3 V m the increase in the horizontal high frequency RMS jitter is typically less than 3 ps RMS of jitter added using the square root of the sum of the squares method An example follows If an 80C01 CR operating in clock recovery trigger mode exhibits 3 5 ps RMS of edge jitter with no EMC field applied and for an ideal jitterless input then for applied fields up to 3 V m the edge jitter degradation would typically result in a total RMS jitter of Jitter lt 3 5ps 3ps 4 61ps EN 61000 3 2 AC Power Harmonic Current Emissions Radiated emissions may exceed the levels specified in EN 61326 when this instrument is connected to a test object Complies with EMC Framework per the following standard AS NZS 2064 1 2 Class A Radiated and Conducted Emissions To ensure compliance with EMC requirements only high quality shielded cables having a reliable continuous outer shield braid amp foil with full coverage low impedance connections to shielded connector housings at both ends should be connected to this product Compliance was demonstrated to the following specification as listed in the Official J ournal of the European Union Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC amended by 93 69 EEC EN 61010 1 A2 1995 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use UL3111 1 Standard for electri
288. ut and sometimes input of instrument data elements in a form suitable to the user The process overview that follows describes each step in the top level cycle of instrument operation CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 2 5 Operating Basics Process Overview Map Process overview Reset Idling Abort Power On Implement setup Wait for trigger accept trigger Wait Delay time S top condition Add one Sample interval to Delay time Take 1 sample per active channel Waveform record complete Yes Waveform available 1 Note if acquiring when powered down the oscilloscope may skip the idle state and resume acquisition starting with step 3 Process block description 1 The instrument starts in the idle state it enters this state upon power up upon receiving most control setting changes or upon finishing acquisition tasks 2 When you toggle its RUN STOP control to RUN the instrument implements its setup based on the current control settings upon start up these are default or last setup depending on user set preferences 3 The instrument then begins waiting for a trigger No sampling takes place until triggering criteria are met or a free run trigger is forced Auto trigger mode only The instrument accepts trigger 4 Theinstrumentthen waits a delay time that is it delays taking a sample until a specified time elapses where Delay time Horizontal Pos Ch Deskew N sample
289. v ve 2 00 6mv Av 4 00 2m El 1 50805 r2 3 178us AE 57us l AE B598 8KHz 3 77 Measuring Waveforms What Sources Cursors can measure channel reference and math waveforms as well as Can I Measure waveform databases You may set the source of each cursor explicitly in the Cursor Setup dialog box Keys to Using Cursors The key points that follow describe operating considerations for setting up cursors to obtain best measurement results Cursor Types The three cursor types are described in Table 3 6 on page 3 77 There are two cursors displayed for all types Cursor 1 and Cursor 2 the cursor currently selected for adjustment is the solid cursor bottom cursor in Fig ure 3 22 is 100 0m idiw E 20 00m idiv vi 300 Ory we 60 43 Ay 2 39 Grn 3 divisions at 100 mV div Cursor 2 3 divisions at 20 mV div Figure 3 22 Horizontal cursors measure amplitudes Cursors are Display Limited You cannot move a cursor off screen Also if you resize waveforms the cursors do not track That is a cursor stays at its screen position ignoring changes to horizontal and vertical scale and position and to vertical offset Cursors Default to the Selected Waveform Each cursor measures its source defined in the Cursors Setup dialog box Note the following behavior regarding source selection M When cursors are first turned on the instrument automatically assigns them to use the waveform currently selected on scree
290. v u 30 Peak Hits of Histogram Hits of Waveforms Description The average of all acquired points within or on the histogram box Half of all acquired points within or on the histogram box are less than and half are greater than this value The standard deviation Root Mean Square RMS deviation of all acquired points within or on the histogram box The peak to peak value of the histogram Vertical histograms display the amplitude of the highest nonzero bin minus the amplitude of the lowest nonzero bin Horizontal histograms display the time of the rightmost nonzero bin minus the time of the leftmost nonzero bin The percentage of points in the histogram which are within 1 standard deviation of the histogram mean The percentage of points in the histogram which are within 2 standard deviations of the histogram mean The percentage of points in the histogram which are within 3 standard deviations of the histogram mean Displays the number of points in the largest bin of the histogram Displays the number of hits within or on the histogram box Displays the number of waveforms that have contributed to the histogram CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases Using Waveform Databases A waveform database is a three dimensional accumulation of a source waveform as it is repeatedly acquired In addition to the standard vertical and horizontal dimensions each waveform
291. venting it When a waveform aliases it appears on screen with a frequency lower than that of the input signal or it appears unstable even though the TRIG D light is lit Aliasing occurs because the instrument sample interval is too long to construct an accurate waveform record See Figure 3 6 Ee Actual High F requency Waveform Apparent Low frequency Waveform Due to Aliasing Sampled Points C C Figure 3 6 Aliasing Methods to Check and Eliminate Aliasing To quickly check for aliasing slowly adjust the horizontal scale to a faster time per division setting If the shape of the displayed waveform changes drastically or becomes stable at a faster time base setting your waveform was probably aliased You can also try pressing the AUTOSET button to eliminate aliasing To avoid aliasing be sure to set resolution so that the instrument samples the input signal at a rate more than twice as fast as the highest frequency component For example a signal with frequency components of 500 MHz would need to be sampled with a sample interval less than 1 nanosecond to represent it accurately and to avoid aliasing 3 22 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Acquiring Waveforms To Set Acquisition Modes Use the procedure that follows to set the data acquisition mode and specify acquisition start and stop methods For more detailed information display online help when performing the procedure Overview To set acquisitions modes Control
292. view Set Stop Action amp 9 start testing 10 11 12 C1 Restart testing 13 From the application menu bar select Setup and then select Acquisition In the Acq Setup dialog box see right check the Condition option under Stop After In the Condition pulldown list select a mask related criteria such as Mask Total Hits and set a count such as 1 in the count box These settings will stop acquisition when mask violations satisfy the criteria you set here See below Push the RUN STOP front panel button to restart acquisition if stopped To restart after a Stop After condition occurs push the front panel CLEAR DATA front panel button Tip If you wantto acquire one and only one more waveform after the Stop After condition occurs push the RUN STOP front panel button instead of CLEAR DATA CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual To Mask Test a Waveform Cont Related Control Elements and Resources Stop After C Run Stop Button Only Condition Mask T atal Hits 1 Stop Action None Filename mi Waveform C1 55 00pWidiv OC 12 5TH4 Mask1 0 Mask2 60 Mask3 0 Total 60 Waveforms 195 ACQUISITION DATA RUN 3 129 Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases To Edita Mask When you edit a mask in an existing communications standard the mask type switches from the selected standard to type User and uses the masks from the Standard
293. w to acquire the signal without clipping M Set the trigger level to the approximate midlevel of the trigger signal being applied either an external trigger or a clock recovery trigger m Evaluate the signal transitions and set the horizontal scale to produce a waveform display based on the Autoset mode selected Edge Period or Bit Eye Pattern Sometimes Autoset cannot produce a correct display due to the nature of the input signal if so you may have to adjust the scale trigger and acquisition controls manually Some conditions that can cause Autoset to fail are M no signal present BM signals with extreme or variable duty cycles M signals with multiple or unstable signal periods BM signals with too low amplitude M no recognizable trigger signal M no eye diagram waveform present when autosetting in Bit Eye Pattern autoset mode Vertical Acquisition Window Considerations The size of the vertical acquisition window is determined by the operating range of the the sampling module and any probe connected to it The vertical offset determines where the vertical window is positioned relative to ground Parts of the signal amplitude that fall within the vertical window are acquired parts outside if any are not they are clipped As an example consider that a basic S0E00 series sampling module with a maximum 100 mV div scale covers 1 volt over 10 divisions Changing the vertical scale setting only changes how much of the ve
294. y given channel the instrument builds the waveform record through use of some common parameters common means they affect the waveforms in all channels Figure 3 9 shows how these common parameters define the waveform record as shown in the figure they define where in the data stream data is taken and how much data is taken Locate the following parameters in the figure m Sample Interval The precise time between sample points taken during acquisition m Record Length The number of samples required to fill a waveform record W Trigger Point The trigger point marks the time zero in a waveform record All waveform samples are located in time with respect to the trigger point m Horizontal Delay The time lapse from the trigger point to the first sample taken first point in the waveform record It is set indirectly by setting the horizontal position see Horizontal Position and the Horizontal Reference on page 3 53 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 27 Acquiring Waveforms 3 28 Acquisition Cycle Sample interval AEH Waveform record acquired over many acquisitions 1 sample per acquisition First sampled and digitized point Recurring trigger events from trigger signal M Horizontal delay Figure 3 9 The waveform record and its defining parameters As Figure 3 9 shows the instrument acquires points in order from left to right with each point from a separate t
295. yboard For most operations you can use the touchscreen instead CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 53 Displaying Waveforms The table below lists some operations and the mouse touchscreen equivalents The instrument ships with two styluses Using a stylus can make it easier to perform touchscreen operations Table 3 4 Equivalent mouse and touchscreen operations Select waveforms Left click object on screen Touch object on screen Push toolbar and dialog box buttons Display menus and select menu items Activate list boxes Position cursors on screen draw a zoom Left click and drag Touch and drag box Display a pop up menu for a channel or a Right click object Touch and hold don t move stylus readout Type a value in a list box Click the keyboard icon to pop up the Touch the keyboard icon to pop up the virtual keyboard click to type in the value virtual keyboard touch to type in the value you want or use the peripheral keyboard if you want installed Display a tool tip Rest pointer over UI button or label None Display What s This Help Click the appropriate button see below Touch the appropriate button see below and then click a control in the UI application and then touch a control in the UI application dg main screen button dg main screen button 3 dialog box button E dialog box button 3 54 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Displaying Waveforms To Display Waveforms in Use the procedure th
296. you select a different source Check On to begin accumulating into the waveform database Check Display Database to turn on the display of the waveform database on the graticule NOTE An alternative method of turning on a waveform database for the selected waveform is by clicking the waveform database button in the toolbar See right See Figures 3 30 and 3 31 on next page to see what both normal and waveform database waveform data look like on the graticule End of Procedure CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual 3 141 Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases As you can see in the illustrations below the normal vector view of a waveform displays the waveform data in dot mode the waveform display is updated with each acquisition to reflect the current data In Fig 3 31 waveform database display has been turned on and you can see the waveform data accumulation is displayed all at once with subsequent acquisition data being added to the display as it is acquired 2 MM S00 Dpsrdise Figure 3 31 Waveform database view of a waveform 3 142 CSA8000 amp TDS8000 User Manual Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases To Customize the Database Display Overview Prerequisites 1 Access the 2 Wfm Database Setup dialog box Set display options Examples 4 the procedure that follows The instrument must have a waveform assigned to one of the two waveform databases O

User Manual CSA8000 Communications Signal Analyzer TDS8000

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents